JP7418844B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known in which the lottery probability of a jackpot lottery triggered by a winning of a game ball in a starting slot can be set in stages.

In such gaming machines, it is advantageous for the player to be able to guess the setting of the lottery probability, so some gaming machines suggest setting the lottery probability in order to increase interest (for example, see Patent Document 1). .

JP2021-078820A

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of technology for increasing the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the interest of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples.

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a drawing with a drawing probability according to the setting information when drawing a drawing when a game ball enters,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that makes suggestions based on the setting information,
having a plurality of setting suggestion presentation states in which settings regarding the setting suggestion presentation are different from each other;
The setting suggestion performance is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states,
It is possible to execute a transition process of transitioning from a first state of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states to a second state in which the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player compared to the first state,
executing the transition process when the pending icon becomes a specific icon and the display mode of the specific icon changes;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Application example 2]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a drawing with a drawing probability according to the setting information when drawing a drawing when a game ball enters ,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that makes suggestions based on the setting information,
having a plurality of setting suggestion presentation states in which settings regarding the setting suggestion presentation are different from each other;
The setting suggestion performance is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states,
It is possible to execute a transition process of transitioning from a first state of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states to a second state in which the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player compared to the first state,
When the number of times the lottery has been drawn reaches a certain number, the display of the current setting suggestion presentation state is ended,
In the transition process, the more advantageous the setting information is to the player, the greater the certain number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of display devices. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. It is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table. It is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a non-time saving state. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a time saving state. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of sub-control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the state of setting suggestion performance. It is a flowchart of state transition processing. It is a flowchart of setting suggestion performance determination processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion production table. It is an explanatory diagram showing state change performance A of setting suggestion performance. It is an explanatory view showing state change performance B of the setting suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing state change performance C of setting suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing state change performance D of setting suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing state change performance E of setting suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing state change performance F of setting suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing state change performance G of setting suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing state change performance H of setting suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing state change performance I of setting suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing state change performance J of setting suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing state change performance K of setting suggestion performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing state change production L of setting suggestion production. It is a diagram for explaining a state change effect M of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure for explaining state change performance N of setting suggestion performance. It is a diagram for explaining a state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect. It is a diagram for explaining a state change effect P of a setting suggestion effect. 42 is a diagram for explaining a continuation of the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 41. FIG. It is a figure for explaining state change performance Q of setting suggestion performance. It is a figure for explaining state change production R of setting suggestion production. 45 is a diagram for explaining a continuation of the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 44. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining a state change effect S of a setting suggestion effect. It is a diagram for explaining a state change effect T of a setting suggestion effect. It is a diagram for explaining a state change effect U of a setting suggestion effect. It is a diagram for explaining a state change effect V of a setting suggestion effect.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained so as to correspond to the left-right direction as seen from the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires game balls based on a player's firing operation, and when a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to a front frame (front frame part) 53, an outer frame (base frame part) that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. We are prepared. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and an excess ball tray (lower tray). ) 62, a production button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, a select button 68, and a frame movable body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the gaming area 3 of the gaming board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, and causes the game ball to be launched at a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit disposed near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player during a performance performed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation part imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the sword handle, and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. Ru. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward, and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs a light emitting effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform sound production during games and the like. The select button 68 is a so-called cross key, and is composed of a left button, a right button, an upper button, and a lower button, and allows various inputs. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be movable from a stored state in which it is stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state in which it projects above the front frame 53.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (belly button) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electronic chew) 22. , a gate (through chucker) 28, a big winning device (attacker) 31, a general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), an out opening 16, and display devices 40.

The game area 3 is an area where game balls shot by operating the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided protrudingly. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by operating the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and emits light from the back side of the game area 3.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the gaming area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a performance pattern display area in which performance patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a pending image display area in which pending images 9A and 9B are displayed. area, and a pending digested image display area in which the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also called hold icons 9A and 9B. The pending digested image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also referred to as the pending image 9C or the pending icon 9C. Furthermore, since the pending digested image 9C does not, strictly speaking, indicate pending, it is also referred to as the variable image 9C or the variable icon 9C.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas: "left", "middle", and "right". A left presentation pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium performance pattern (medium decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the medium pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, by a combination of effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

For example, in the case of winning a jackpot, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed as a zero number such as "777". If it is a miss, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with a miss, such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result not only on the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b but also on the image display device 7. Note that the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Furthermore, the manner in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner may be a manner in which they are scrolled in the vertical direction, or may be in any other manner. The combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the performance that displays the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will also be referred to as a "variable performance of performance symbols," a "variable display of decorative symbols," or simply a "variable performance." In addition, for this decorative pattern variation performance, the performance during the period from when the special symbol starts changing until it stops (also referred to as a special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation performance. Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts changing until it stops, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol variation performance, a jackpot performance that is performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc. In the performance symbol variation performance, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed in addition to the performance symbols. In addition to the production pattern, the image display device 7 also includes an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can indicate that the special pattern is changing or indicate the lottery result of the special pattern. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that the identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of stored first special figures reserved, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B that displays reserved images 9B according to the number of stored second special figures reserved, which will be described later. and a second hold display area. By displaying the holding images 9A and 9B, the stored number of first special figure holdings displayed on the first special figure holding display 43a, which will be described later, and the number of second special figure holdings displayed on the second special figure holding display 43b are determined. The number of memories can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays the pending digest image 9C. The pending digesting image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the pending digesting image 9C, the first special symbol pending or the second special symbol pending It is possible to clearly display to the player that the special drawing reservation has been completed ("extinction of special drawing reservation" to be described later).

A first board movable body 14 (also referred to as the first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided below the image display device 7. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a plate-shaped member is movable up and down. The first movable accessory 14 normally stands still at a retracted position below the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and can move upward (advance) from the retracted position and come to rest at the advanced position. . The first movable accessory 14 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

The center decoration 10 is located near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decoration body 10. A stage part 11 is formed at the lower part of the center decoration body 10. The stage part 11 has a shape that can guide a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage part 11 to a first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decorative body 10. The warp section 12 includes an inlet section through which game balls flow in and an outlet section through which game balls flow out, and causes the game balls that flowed in through the inlet section to flow out to the stage section 11 through the exit section.

The fixed winning device (belly button) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3, and is located at a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball entering hole) where the ease of entering the game ball always remains constant. (fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for obtaining a jackpot random number and the like and determining a jackpot.

The normal variable prize winning device (electronic chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting hole 20 in the gaming area 3, and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entering hole, variable starting hole) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 is an opportunity for a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. Note that the electric chew 22 only needs to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible for the ball to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the big prize winning device (attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to release the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for obtaining a normal symbol random number (a winning random number) and determining a winning number.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and this acquired random number is used as a predetermined random number. It is a process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot by comparing it with the value corresponding to the "jackpot". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a first special symbol display 41a or a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is made. When the time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game is performed in which performance symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variably displayed special symbols, and the jackpot lottery result is more effectively notified to the player by this symbol matching game.

In addition, "normal symbol lottery" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining a normal symbol is obtained, and this obtained random number is compared with a predetermined value corresponding to a "win". It is a process of determining whether or not it is a hit by doing so. Regarding the lottery result of this normal symbol, the lottery result is not announced immediately after the game ball passes through the gate 28, but the normal symbol is displayed fluctuating on the regular symbol display 42, which will be described later, and a predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed (lit or extinguished) and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The big winning device (attacker, special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and includes a big winning hole (special winning hole) 30. The big prize opening 30 includes an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or inhibits reception of game balls through a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a big prize opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the big prize opening 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The big winning hole sensor 30a (FIG. 3) detects the winning of a game ball into the big winning hole 30. The grand prize device 31 of this embodiment further includes a grand prize device ejection sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the grand prize device 31.

The general winning hole 27 is provided at the lower part of the gaming area 3. The out port 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the display devices 40 will be described later.

The gaming area 3 includes a left gaming area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right gaming area 3B on the right side. A hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, a hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called "right-handed hitting." In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning in the first starting opening 20 by playing left-handed. On the other hand, the configuration is such that by hitting right, you can aim to pass through the gate 28 and win the second starting opening 21 and the big winning opening 30.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display 43b. , and a general figure reservation display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The first special symbol reservation display 43a displays the number of stored operation reservations (first special symbol reservation) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reservation display 43b displays the number of stored operation reservations (second special symbol reservation) of the second special symbol display 41b. The normal symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of stored operation reservations (common symbol reservations) of the ordinary symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the second starting port 21. Below, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as a "special symbol." Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as the "special symbol display 41." In addition, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b are also collectively referred to as the "special figure holding display 43."

The special symbol display device 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (fluctuating display) and then stops displaying the special symbol (identification information). , jackpot lottery) results. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. When the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stopping pattern, the big winning hole 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of won jackpot). A special game (jackpot game) is played. There are also multiple types of special symbols (losing symbols) that stop losing. The opening pattern of the big winning hole 30 in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you can select one or two from the left as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display jackpot symbols. If it is a loss, a losing symbol such as "●●●●●●●○" with only the rightmost LED lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. For example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all the LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers obtained for that winning are , is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 84e (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is in the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area (not shown) as the first special drawing holding, and if it is winning in the second starting opening 21, It is stored in a second special figure reservation storage area (not shown) as a second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 84e, and the upper limit in this embodiment is 4 for both the first special figure reservation storage area and the second special figure reservation storage area. It becomes. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 84e is consumed when variable display of special symbols based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Extinguishing the special symbol reservation" refers to determining the jackpot random number etc. corresponding to the special symbol reservation and executing a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during execution of a medium or special game, the right to draw a jackpot for that prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number of prizes. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. The first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b each include, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure reservation display 43 displays the number of special symbols reserved by lighting up LEDs corresponding to the number of special symbols reserved.

The variable display of the normal symbols is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stop displaying them. The normal pattern that is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern that is stopped and the normal pattern that is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one normal pattern that is selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stopping pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (normal pattern with a predetermined stopping pattern, that is, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. will be held. Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off), is displayed. If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol such as "●○" with only the right LED lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off as a normal losing symbol may be adopted. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. As for the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be lit alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all the LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (winning random number) obtained for the passage is stored as a normal symbol in the normal symbol retention storage area 84f (FIG. 5). Once it is memorized. There is an upper limit to the number of general figure reservations that can be stored in the ordinary figure reservation storage area 84f, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The general symbol reservation stored in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area 84f is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of a normal symbol reservation means to determine the normal symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation, and to execute a variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, when the variable display of the normal symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed, winnings will be won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right to draw a normal symbol lottery for the passing of a predetermined number of symbols as an upper limit. The number of general drawings on hold is displayed on the general drawing holding display 44. The common picture reservation display 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common pictures pending by lighting up the LEDs for the number of common pictures pending.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls gaming profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effects to be executed as the game progresses, and together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the audio control board 106, constitutes a sub-control unit. Note that the sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first starting port sensor 20a, the second starting port sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the big winning port sensor 30a, the normal winning port sensor 27a, and the discharge sensor 25. Illustrated. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chew solenoid 24 and the big prize opening solenoid 33. The first starting port sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting port 20, and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The big winning hole sensor 30a is provided inside the big winning hole 30, and detects the game ball that has entered the big winning hole 30. The normal winning hole sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the normal winning hole 27. The discharge sensor 25 is provided at the most downstream side of the game board 2 and detects all the game balls launched into the game area 3. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the big winning device 31.

Display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol pending display 43a, a second special symbol pending display 43b, and a normal symbol pending. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

The external terminal board 70 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 sends information to the external terminal board 70 such as prize ball information, door or frame opening information, the number of changes in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting port 20, and the second starting port 21. It outputs information such as whether the game ball has won a prize or a jackpot, as well as a security signal.

A setting change device 71 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The setting change device 71 allows the jackpot probability of the gaming machine to be set in a maximum of six levels.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for monitoring payout. A prize ball payout device 120, a rental ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and a shooting device 112 is connected via a shooting control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the rental ball payout device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out rental balls. The paid-out rental balls are detected by the rental ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the firing device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

A sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The production control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the production of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub-ROM that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. It includes a CPU 92 and an RTC 95 that enables time measurement. The RTC 95 is backed up by a primary battery or a secondary battery (not shown). Therefore, the RTC 95 continues to measure time even when the gaming machine 1 is powered off. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the production control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 , and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub-control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The real-time clock 95 (hereinafter referred to as "RTC 95") has a built-in RAM that stores calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day, time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second, and day of the week information that specifies the day of the week. The RTC 95 is supplied with control power and backup power for the built-in RAM from a button-type battery provided on the sub-control board 90, and is independent of the power supplied to the sub-control board 90. Therefore, even if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 95 updates and retains calendar information, time information, day of the week information, etc. by supplying control power from the button battery and backup power from the built-in RAM. ing. Note that when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the RTC 95 supplies the power supplied to the sub-control board 90 as a control power source and a backup power source for the built-in RAM, and when the gaming machine 1 is powered off, the power is supplied to the sub-control board 90. The circuit may be configured such that control power and backup power for the built-in RAM are supplied from a button-type battery provided in the sub-control board 90.

In addition to the calendar information, time information, and day of the week information, the built-in RAM also contains state change performance permission information indicating whether to perform the state change performance of the setting suggestion performance, and start information when performing the state change performance of the setting suggestion performance. Termination information is also retained. This start/end information includes time zone information from the start to end of the state change performance of the setting suggestion performance, information on the number of days that have passed since the gaming machine 1 performs the state change performance of the setting suggestion performance based on the number of days that have passed since the introduction, and a specific day of the week. There is information on a specific day of the week on which a state change effect of a setting suggestion effect is performed, and specific day information on which a state change effect of a setting suggestion effect is performed on a specific day (specific date).

The state change performance permission information and the start/end information indicate that the game machine 1 is powered on and is in a customer waiting state (for example, the game is not started and a standby screen is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7). state and the state in which each production pattern is stopped and displayed), the clerk of the game hall operates the production button 63 or the select button 68, first displays the setting screen on the display screen 7a, and then displays the setting screen according to the contents of the setting screen. Then, the setting is made by operating the effect button 63 or select button 68 again.

For example, when a clerk at a game hall or the like wants to set the state change performance of the setting suggestion performance not to be performed, he/she operates the select button 68 and selects it so that the state change performance permission information is set to "OFF". It is confirmed by operating the production button 63, and the setting is completed. On the other hand, when setting to perform the state change production of the setting suggestion production, operate the select button 68 to select it and operate the production button 63 so that the state change production permission information is set to "ON". Confirm by doing.

When the state change effect of the setting suggestion effect is set to be performed, the process then proceeds to a start/end information setting screen for setting start/end information on the setting screen. On this start/end information setting screen, when setting the time period from the start to the end of the state change performance of the setting suggestion performance, by operating the select button 68 and the performance button 63, you can select a single time period or You can set the time zone information by setting multiple time zones, and when setting the number of days that have passed since the introduction of the state change effect of the setting suggestion effect, you can set the time zone information by operating the select button 68 and the effect button 63. The number of days that have passed since introduction or a plurality of days that have passed since introduction can be set to set the number of days that have passed since introduction, and when setting a specific day of the week on which the state change effect of the setting suggestion effect is to be performed, press the select button 68 and the effect button 63. You can set specific day information by setting a single specific day of the week or multiple specific days of the week by operating the select button. 68 and the effect button 63, it is possible to set a single specific day (specific date) or a plurality of specific days (specific dates) to set specific day information.

For example, the time period may be a single time period such as "18:00 to 22:00", "10:00 to 10:05", or "10:20 to 10:25". , . . . may be set as multiple time zones. For example, the number of days that have passed since the introduction of the game machine 1 may be a single number of days that has passed since the game machine 1 was introduced into the game hall, such as "5 days", "5 days", "10 days", "15 days", etc. It is possible to set the number of days elapsed since introduction, such as... The specific day of the week may be, for example, a single specific day of the week, Friday, or multiple specific days of the week, such as Friday and Saturday. The specific date information may be, for example, a single specific day (specific date) such as the 8th from the pachinko "Pachi", or the 8th, which is the day after the pachinko "Pachi". A plurality of specific dates (specific dates) such as "18th" and "28th" may be used.

Note that the time zone information, the number of days since introduction, the specific day of the week information, and the specific day information may be used alone or in combination. In the single case, there is time zone information. In the case of combinations, there is a combination of elapsed days of introduction information and time zone information, a combination of specific day of the week information and time zone information, and a combination of specific day information and time zone information.

Furthermore, in the case of a single information, in addition to the time zone information, any one of the information on the number of days elapsed since introduction, the specific day of the week information, and the specific day information may be used. In this case, although it is possible to determine the day on which the state change performance of the setting suggestion performance is to be performed, the time period (start time and end Since the time period) cannot be determined, the time period (start time and end time) will be determined by lottery in the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to programs for display control, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data displayed on the image display device 7, including characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. image data such as background images, etc.) are stored. RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. CPU 102 executes a program stored in ROM 103. The production control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. etc. is output. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. Note that the voice control board 106 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and may store acoustic data in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

A frame lamp 66, a board lamp 5, a first movable accessory 14, and a second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and controls these. The production control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, light emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and creates a light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The production control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The first movable accessory 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided below the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decoration body 10. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and controls the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory according to the motion pattern data. 2. Controls the operation of the movable accessory 15. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to control the lighting of the lamp and control the operation of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

A production button 63, a select button 68, and a frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108. When the production button 63 is pressed (pressed down) by the player, it outputs a switch signal to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. Further, the production control microcomputer 91 operates the production button 63 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The production button 63 can not only be operated by pressing, but also changeable between a normal position (buried position) in which the upper surface of the button body protrudes slightly, and a protruding position in which most of the button body protrudes. It has become. In other words, as one of the effects, the effect button 63 is raised up. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates position change data (drive data) for changing the position of the performance button 63, and controls the operation of the performance button 63 according to the position change data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the position change data. When the select button 68 is pressed (pressed down) by the player, it outputs a switch signal to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108.

The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that a touch sensor or the like that is provided on the front frame 53 and outputs a detection signal when a human body comes into contact with it may be connected to the relay board 108.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5(A) is a diagram for explaining the main ROM 83. FIG. 5(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6(A) is a diagram for explaining the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) is provided with a program storage area 83a and a table storage area 83b. The table storage area 83b includes a jackpot determination table, a reach determination table, a normal symbol hit determination table, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table, a jackpot type determination table, a fluctuation pattern determination table, an electric chew opening pattern determination table, and a big winning opening pattern. Judgment tables, etc. are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) that the game control microcomputer 81 executes.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reservation storage area 84e, and a general figure reservation memory. An area 84f, a setting information storage area 84g, and a work area 84h are provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main processing (described later), and includes advance determination commands, pending pitch count commands, A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the status of the gaming machine and the gaming status are set in the main control main processing (described later), and include the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, ceiling flag, etc. Set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in main control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variable counter, a time saving counter, a game counter, a ceiling counter, and the like. The special operation status setting area 84d is an area where a status in special operation processing, which will be described later, is set. The special figure reservation storage area 84e includes a first special figure reservation storage area in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area in which the second special figure reservation is stored. The first special figure reservation storage area stores random value groups (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storage. The second special figure reservation storage area includes a first memory for storing random value groups (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal symbol reservation storage area 84f stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as normal symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth symbols of the ordinary symbol reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for. The setting information storage area 84g is an area for storing setting information of the gaming machine set by the setting change device 71 (FIG. 3). The setting information is information that is set in six stages, settings 1 to 6. The work area 84h is a work area that implements temporary storage for calculations and the like. Note that the other areas except the work area 84h are backed up by a power source (not shown), and their contents are retained even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

The sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6(A)) is provided with a program storage area 93a and a table storage area 93b. The table storage area 93b stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table, a basic performance pattern determination table, a chance-up performance pattern determination table, a stop symbol pattern determination table, a setting suggestion performance execution table, a setting suggestion performance pattern table, etc. These tables are referred to by the production control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) that the production control microcomputer 91 executes.

The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6(B)) includes a command storage area 94a, a production command set area 94b, a counter set area 94c, a setting information storage area 94d, a suggestion state storage area 94e, a work area 94f, is provided.

The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in sub-control main processing (described later), including advance judgment commands, pending pitch count commands, fluctuation start commands, and fluctuation commands. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored.

The effect command set area 94b is an area where commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub-control main processing (described later). It is an output buffer) in which a variable performance start command, a fluctuation before end command, a variable performance end command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, an ending performance start command, etc. are set.

The counter set area 94c is an area where counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a first special symbol reservation performance counter, a second special symbol reservation performance counter, and a regular symbol reservation performance counter. , a variable performance counter, a time saving performance counter, etc. are set.

The setting information storage area 94d is an area where setting information output from the main control unit side is stored.

The setting suggestion state storage area 94e is an area for storing the state of the setting suggestion effect and state related information related to the state. There are four states of the setting suggestion effect: state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4. The state-related information is information such as a history of transitions between these states and a history of patterns of setting suggestion effects executed in each state.

The work area 94f is a work area that implements temporary storage for calculations and the like. Note that the other areas except the work area 94f are backed up by a power source (not shown), and their contents are retained even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Here, various random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the gaming machine 1 will be explained.
The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number," a "jackpot type random number," a "reach random number," a "variable pattern random number," and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at timings described later. It is configured as follows. Both are acquired as the value of the random number counter in the counter set area 84c of the main RAM 84. A plurality of random number counters are prepared corresponding to each random number counter.
The "jackpot random number" is a random number used for lottery to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535.
The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for lottery of the winning jackpot type (jackpot type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127.
"Reach Random Number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the performance symbol variation performance that indicates the result when the jackpot judgment is a loss, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one fluctuating performance symbol remaining among multiple performance symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the fluctuating performance symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a state in which a combination of performance symbols indicates a jackpot (for example, a state of "7↓7"). Note that the performance symbols that are displayed in a stopped state in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if they are shaking within the display screen 7a.

The "variation pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127.
The "normal symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chew 22. Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range from 0 to 255.
The “jackpot random number,” “jackpot type random number,” “reach random number,” and “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on the ball entering the starting hole (first starting hole 20 or second starting hole 21). The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area. 2 is stored in the special figure reservation storage area. The “normal symbol random number (winning random number)” is obtained based on passing through the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the ordinary symbol retention storage area 84f.

Next, various random numbers acquired by the performance control microcomputer 91 in the gaming machine 1 will be explained.
The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "preread performance random number", a "chance up random number", a "setting suggestion execution random number", and a "setting suggestion performance pattern determination random number". Both are acquired as the value of the random number counter in the counter set area 94c of the sub-RAM 94. A plurality of random number counters are prepared corresponding to each random number counter.

The "pre-read effect random number" is a random number used to determine the pre-read effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "pre-read effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a preliminary determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The obtained random number group is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during the variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a fluctuation start command being output from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

The "setting suggestion execution random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "setting suggestion execution random number" is acquired in accordance with the execution of the setting suggestion effect determination process (FIG. 24). The obtained random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

The "setting suggestion performance pattern determination random number" is a random number used to determine the content of the setting suggestion performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "setting suggested performance pattern determination random number" is acquired in accordance with the execution of the setting suggested performance determining process (FIG. 24). The obtained random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

4. Description of various tables FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table.
In the jackpot determination table, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the acquired jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss" in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table that is referenced to do this. The jackpot determination in the jackpot determination table is performed based on the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area 84g (FIG. 5). For example, if the setting information is "setting 1" in the "normal probability state" and the jackpot random number is "0 to 409", it will be determined as a "jackpot"; (410-65535)”, it is determined that the result is a “loss”. For example, if the setting information is "setting 1" in the "high probability state" and the jackpot random number is "0 to 936", it will be determined as a "jackpot"; If the number is 937 to 65535, it is determined that the result is a loss. The same applies to other setting information.

The reach determination table indicates whether the reach random value (one of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to "reach" or "no reach". This is a table that is referenced to determine the The reach determination in the reach determination table is performed based on the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127)" ”, it is determined that there is no reach. In addition, in the "time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is determined that there is a reach. is determined to be "out of reach".

The normal symbol winning determination table indicates whether the normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to a "win" or a "loss". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the The determination in the normal symbol hit determination table is performed based on the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 2 (3 to 255 )”, it is determined as a “lose”. In addition, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254", it will be determined as a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)", it will be determined as a "win". , it is judged as a “lose”.

In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol fluctuation time is according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table referenced for this purpose. In this embodiment, in the "non-time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the "time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is determined to be "1 second".

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type determination table is referred to by the gaming control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the "jackpot type" according to the acquired jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127). This is the table that will be used.

In FIG. 8, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 77", the jackpot type is determined to be "4R probability variable jackpot", and the jackpot type random number is determined to be "4R probability variable jackpot". When the numerical value is "78 to 115", the jackpot type is determined to be "8R normal jackpot", and when the jackpot type random value is "116 to 127", it is determined to be "2R probability variable jackpot". Incidentally, the "2R certain variable jackpot" is a mode in which a jackpot is not reported. Hereinafter, it will also be referred to as a "latent and certain strange jackpot."
On the other hand, if you win in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 89", the jackpot type is determined to be "8R guaranteed variable jackpot", and the jackpot type random number is In the case of "90-127", the jackpot type is determined to be "8R normal jackpot". In addition, in the jackpot type determination table, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED) command" of the special game may also be specified.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a fluctuation pattern determination table in a non-time saving state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a fluctuation pattern determination table in a time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random number value (0 to 127).

In FIG. 9, for example, a prize is won in the first starting slot 20 in a non-time-saving state, the jackpot determination table determines that it is a "lose", the reach determination table determines that there is a "reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2". ”, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is “0 to 60”, it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “P7”. In FIG. 10, for example, a prize is won in the second starting slot 21 in the time saving state, the jackpot determination table determines that it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type determination table determines that it is an "8R probability variable jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0". .about.10'', the variation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when reaching a reach, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect where the fluctuation time after reach is longer than normal reach. Here, three types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3) with different variation times are set. SP1-3 are progressively executed after normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP3 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-association.

The electric chew opening pattern determination table is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state). This is the table that will be used. In the present embodiment, when the electric chew 22 is in the "non-time saving state", the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be the "opening pattern 11", and when it is in the "time saving state", the opening pattern is determined to be the "opening pattern 12". In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, each opening time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) is 1.0 seconds. However, the opening of this electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular winning number, maximum 10).

The big winning hole opening pattern determination table is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in order to determine the opening pattern of the big winning hole 30 in the main control main processing (described later). In this embodiment, in the case of a "4R jackpot", it is determined that the pattern is "open pattern 21". In the "opening pattern 21", in the 1st to 4th R, the big prize opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). In addition, in the case of "8R jackpot", it is determined as "opening pattern 22". In the "opening pattern 22", the big prize opening 30 is opened once in the 1st to 8th R, and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). In the case of "2R jackpot", it is determined as "open pattern 23". In the "opening pattern 23", in the 1st to 2nd R, the big winning hole 30 is opened once for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening).

5. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "losses" as a result of jackpot drawings (special symbol drawings). In the case of a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a "jackpot game" is executed in which the jackpot (big jackpot 30) is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. A jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. There are four types of jackpots: "4R sure-variable jackpot," "8R regular jackpot," "2R probability-variable jackpot," and "8R probability-variable jackpot." The "probable variable jackpot" becomes a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability, high-base state) after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the "normal jackpot" becomes a low probability time saving state (low probability high base state) after the jackpot game. Note that the "2R sure-change jackpot" is executed without clearly announcing the jackpot, and the jackpot (big jackpot 30) is opened short, so it is a jackpot in which no game ball can be expected to be won. After the jackpot game, the player enters a high-accuracy, non-time saving state (high-accuracy, low base state).

In addition, as shown in Figure 8, the distribution ratio of jackpots in the first special symbol (special symbol 1) lottery is 78/128 (approximately 60%) for 4R probability variable jackpot and 38/128 (approximately 60%) for 8R regular jackpot. 30%), and the 2R probability jackpot is 11/128 (about 10%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of jackpots in the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 90/128 (approximately 70%) for 8R definite jackpot and 38/128 (approximately 30%) for 8R regular jackpot. ing. In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 is more popular than the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 (first special symbol lottery). The lottery (the lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

6. Description of gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can perform "probability variation control" and "variation time reduction control" on the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, a state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs probability fluctuation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "high probability state", and a state in which no probability fluctuation control is performed is simply referred to as a "normal probability state". (non-high probability state, low probability state). The game control microcomputer 81 performs jackpot judgment using a jackpot judgment table (FIG. 7) in which the number of jackpot random numbers that are judged as jackpots is higher in a high probability state than in a normal probability state, as probability fluctuation control for special symbols. By doing this, a high probability state is achieved. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of hitting the jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, The probability that the display result (stopping symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a jackpot symbol is increased.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 to shorten the fluctuation time is referred to as a "time-saving state", and the state in which the fluctuation time is not controlled to shorten is simply referred to as a "non-time-saving state". That's what it means. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variable display to the time of derivation and display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a variation pattern determination table (FIGS. 9 and 10) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often in a time-saving state than in a non-time-saving state. Determine the fluctuation pattern that has occurred. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the variable time reduction control is not executed, the variation of the special symbol A short variation time is more likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings in the starting opening (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) are more likely to occur. This allows players to aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 81 may perform probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control simultaneously, or only one of them, for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 in parallel with variation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols in the time-saving state, but does not perform them in the non-time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a normal symbol hit determination table in which the number of normal symbol random numbers (winning random numbers) that are determined to be hits is greater in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, as probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols. Then, make a hit judgment (normal pattern judgment). Therefore, in the time saving state, the winning probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, the normal symbol display 42 The probability that the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol (stopped symbol) becomes a winning symbol is increased. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but it is 1 second in the time saving state. Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control on the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes control to increase the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, and control for extending the opening time and increasing number of openings for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball enters the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, a state where these controls are being executed is called a "high base state", and a state where these controls are not being executed is called a "low base state". In a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not need to execute all of the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the control for increasing the number of openings for the electric chew 22. It is only necessary that by executing one or more controls, the electric chew 22 can be opened more easily than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the 4R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot is a high probability state and a time saving state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high-accuracy, high-base state" or a "high-accuracy, time-saving state." The high probability/high base state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (in this case, 30 times) or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the gaming state after the jackpot game due to winning the 8R normal jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, ie, low probability state) and a time saving state (high base state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state." The low-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (in this case, 30 times) or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the 2R probability variable jackpot is a high probability state and a non-time saving state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high probability low base state", "high probability non-time saving state", "latent probability variable state", and "potential probability state". The high-probability-low base state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (in this case, 30 times) or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.
When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state and a low base state (non-electronic support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state." The low-probability, low-base state is sometimes referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low-probability non-time-saving state (also simply referred to as a non-time-saving state)." Further, the state in which a special game (big hit game) is being executed will be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Furthermore, a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a "specific gaming state."

In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, the game can be progressed more advantageously if the game ball enters the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. Due to the electric support control, the electric chew 22 is opened more easily than in the low base state, and it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 21 than to win a prize in the first starting port 20. be. Therefore, in the high base state, the game ball is hit to the right in order to enter the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery. This allows you to get more starting prizes (winning into the starting hole) than if you hit left-handed. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, even during the jackpot game, the game is played with the right hand. On the other hand, in the low base state, the game can proceed more advantageously if the game ball enters the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the ball to the left. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric chew 22 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, and it is easier to win a prize in the first starting port 20 than to win a prize in the second starting port 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, the game ball is hit to the left in order to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 20. This allows you to win more starting prizes than if you hit right-handed.

7. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be explained based on FIGS. 11 to 18. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initialization processing (step S001). In the initialization process, for example, settings of the main CPU 82 and reset of various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the initialization process, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variable pattern random number, normal symbol random number) to 1. Add and update. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, main side timer interrupt processing (step S005) can be executed. The main side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined period (for example, a 4 msec period). That is, the main side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, every 4 msec). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing ends and until the next main side timer interrupt processing starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing is repeatedly executed. . Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the main side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11: step S005). In the main side timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 11) described above. In other words, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and other periods (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing until the start of the next main side timer interrupt processing). It is carried out both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). FIG. 13 is a flowchart of input processing. In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1. The various sensors are the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the big winning opening sensor 30a, the normal winning opening sensor 27a, and the discharge sensor 25 (FIG. 3). The game control microcomputer 81 outputs payout data to the main RAM 84 for paying out prize balls according to the winning holes, that is, the first starting hole 20, the second starting hole 21, the big winning hole 30, and the normal winning hole 27. Set in buffer. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 writes the number of outs (total number) detected by the discharge sensor 25 into the main RAM 84. Then, each time the number of outs increases by 10, an out number command containing the cumulative number of outs is set. Further, when the cumulative number of outs reaches "6000", the cumulative number is reset to "0".

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting port sensor detection process (step S103). In the starting port sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the game ball passes through the gate 28, acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter, and stores the acquired random value in the regular symbol holding storage area 84f of the main RAM 84. Among the first to fourth storage areas, the normal symbol is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and determines the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter. get. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the game ball enters the second starting port 21, and determines the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter. get. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area.

The game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary judgment of a jackpot in the starting port sensor detection process. Based on the random number group described above, it is determined in advance whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot and the fluctuation pattern. Then, a preliminary determination command is created from the preliminary determination result and set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs normal operation processing (step S104). In the normal operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the operation of the electric chew 22. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" or not, and if the number of reserved balls is 1 or more, it refers to the normal symbol hit determination table. Make a hit judgment. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table. The game control microcomputer 81 starts the variable display of normal symbols by setting the selected normal symbol variation pattern. Thereafter, the variable display is stopped, and in the case of a "win", an electric chew opening pattern is set with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table, and the electric chew 22 is activated.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special operation processing (step S105). This special operation process will be described later.
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pending ball number process (step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the number of reserved balls command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84. The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the number of reserved balls, and includes information regarding the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1, the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2, and the number of reserved balls for normal symbols. .

After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S107). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S108). In other processes, for example, the second special figure holding display 43b is controlled to display the number based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 2, which will be described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 1. The hold display 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 12: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the grand prize device (big prize device 31) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into "1", "2", "3", "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation processing, output of a fluctuation stop command etc. is executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and ended, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, sets a fluctuation stop command and performs the special operation. Set the status to "3". When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of an opening command, etc. is executed at the time of a jackpot. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first executes a game state management process. The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time saving times. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" when the jackpot flag is OFF. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is ON, a jackpot opening pattern is set according to the type of jackpot won. After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process. The game state reset process is a process for resetting the probability change flag and the time saving flag. After the game state reset process, a jackpot opening command is set in order to start the jackpot game. After that, set the special operation status to "4". When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Specifically, the opening of the big prize opening 30 is controlled according to an opening pattern based on a round counter, and a round designation command and an ending command are set. Also, at the end of the jackpot, a time saving counter and a probability change counter are set.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 13: Step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401). When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to winning in the second starting opening 21 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area. If there is no such file, the process moves to step S1407. When the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402). In the jackpot determination process, the number of games is incremented, and then a jackpot determination is performed. The jackpot determination is performed using a jackpot determination table. Then, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, and when it is determined that it is a jackpot, it turns on the jackpot flag, determines the jackpot type, and then ends the jackpot determination process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). In the fluctuation pattern selection process, the fluctuation pattern determination table (FIG. 9, FIG. 10) is referred to, and the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 (time-saving state or non-time-saving state), the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step S1402), and the reserved balls are determined. Select a variation pattern based on the number. After the fluctuation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the storage location of the reservation information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area from the current position to the side from which it is read out. At the same time, the reservation information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the second special figure reservation storage area is cleared (step S1405). For example, if pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the pending information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. Through the above steps, the second special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area is reserved. It is shifted to the digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9B (the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reserved images 9B from the left among the 4 reserved images 9B) corresponding to the 2nd to 4th storage areas of the 2nd special figure reserved storage area are 1 on the left side, respectively. (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, a variation display of the second special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information regarding fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" ( Step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to winning in the first starting opening 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area. If there is no such file, the process moves to step S1413. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408). In the jackpot determination process, the number of games is incremented, and then a jackpot determination is performed. The jackpot determination is performed using a jackpot determination table. Then, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, and when it is determined that it is a jackpot, it turns on the jackpot flag, determines the jackpot type, and then ends the jackpot determination process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). In the fluctuation pattern selection process, the fluctuation pattern determination table (FIGS. 9 and 10) is referred to, and the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 (time-saving state or non-time-saving state), the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step S1408), and the reserved balls are determined. Select a variation pattern based on the number. After the fluctuation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is decremented (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area by one position from the current position to the side where they are read out. , clears the reservation information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the first special figure reservation storage area (step S1411). Through the above steps, the first special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area is reserved. It is shifted to the digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9A (the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reserved images 9A from the right among the 4 reserved images 9A) corresponding to the 2nd to 4th storage areas of the 1st special figure reserved storage area are 1 on the right side, respectively. (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special symbol reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and a variation display of the first special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1412). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information regarding fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer waiting command (step S1413) and ends this process. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the extinguishment of the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the first special figure reservation. Furthermore, according to the jackpot type determination table (FIG. 8) of this embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol reservation results in a jackpot that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol reservation. It looks like this.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 13: Step S1306).
In the special symbol confirmation process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process will be described later.
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). The jackpot flag is stored in the flag set area 84b of the main RAM 84. If it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the process moves to step S1803. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is not ON (step S1802: NO), that is, if the jackpot flag is OFF, the special operation status is set to "1" (step S1804), and the special symbol confirmation process is executed. finish.

In step S1803, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern. The opening pattern is as described above, and the opening pattern 21 is set for a 4R jackpot, the opening pattern 22 is set for an 8R jackpot, and the opening pattern 23 is set for a 2R jackpot.
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a latent probability jackpot (step S1805). If it is determined here that it is not a latent probability variable jackpot (step S1805: NO), that is, if it is one of "4R probability variable jackpot", "8R normal jackpot", and "8R probability variable jackpot", the process moves to step S1806. . On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a latent probability variable jackpot (step S1805: YES), that is, if it is a "2R probability variable jackpot", the process moves to step S1809.

In step S1806, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a game state reset process. This process is a process of resetting the probability change flag, time saving flag, and ceiling flag.
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening command (step S1807), sets the special operation status to "4" (step S1808), and ends the special symbol confirmation process.

In step S1809, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag. The probability change flag is stored in the flag set area 84b of the main RAM 84. In particular, if the time saving flag is ON, the time saving flag is turned OFF. At this time, the ceiling flag and ceiling counter are not reset.
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the probability change counter to "30" (step S1810), sets the special operation status to "1", and ends the special symbol confirmation process.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 15: Step S1801).
In the game state management process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). If it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the probability variation counter is decremented (step S2002), and the process moves to step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON (step S2001: NO), that is, if the probability variation flag is OFF, the process moves to step S2010.

In step S2003, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (step S2004), and the process moves to step S2005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process proceeds to step S2005 without executing the process of step S2004.

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the time saving counter is decremented (step S2006), and the process moves to step S2007. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter is not ON (step S2005: NO), that is, if the time saving counter is OFF, the process moves to step S2009.

In step S2007, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving counter is "0". If it is determined that the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is turned off (step S2008) and the process moves to step S2009. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process of step S2008 is not executed and the process moves to step S2009.

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON. If it is determined that the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the ceiling counter is decremented (step S2011), and the process moves to step S2012. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ceiling flag is not ON (step S2010: NO), that is, if the ceiling flag is OFF, the process moves to step S2005.

In step S2012, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the process moves to step S2013. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process moves to step S2005.

In step S2013, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the time saving counter to "350" (step S2014), turns off the ceiling flag (step S2015), and proceeds to step S2009.
In step S2009, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets a gaming state designation command, and ends the gaming state management process.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 13: Step S1308).
In the special electric accessory processing, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot end flag is ON or not (step S1601). If it is determined that the jackpot end flag is ON (step S1601: YES), an ending process is executed (step S1602), and the special electric accessory process is ended. In the ending process, it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed or not, and if it has elapsed, the jackpot end flag is turned OFF, the jackpot flag is turned OFF, the special operation status is set to "1", and the game state is set. After executing the process (step S1603), the special electric accessory process is ended. The game state setting process will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot end flag is not ON (step S1601: NO), that is, if the jackpot end flag is OFF, the process moves to step S1604.

In step S1604, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won in the big prize opening. This process is a process for determining whether or not there is a winning in the big winning hole 30 based on the signal from the big winning hole sensor 30a. If it is determined that a prize has been won in the big winning opening (step S1604: YES), a big winning opening command is set (step S1605), and the process moves to step S1606. On the other hand, if it is determined that no prize has been won in the big winning opening (step S1604: NO), the process proceeds to step S1606 without executing the process of step S1605.

In step S1606, it is determined whether the big prize opening is open. This process is a process for determining whether or not the big prize opening 30 is open. If it is determined that the big winning hole is open (step S1606: YES), the big winning hole closing process is executed (step S1607), and the special electric accessory process is ended. The big winning opening closing process is a process of determining whether the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied or not, and if it is satisfied, closing the big winning opening. On the other hand, if it is determined that the big winning hole is not open (step S1607: NO), that is, if the big winning hole is closed, the process moves to step S1608.

In step S1608, it is determined whether or not it is the big winning opening opening period. This process is a process for determining whether or not it is the opening period of the big winning a prize opening 30. If it is determined that it is the big winning hole opening period (step S1608: YES), the big winning hole opening process is executed (step S1610), a round designation command is set (step S1611), and the special electric accessory Finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the big winning opening opening period (step S1608: NO), a round process is executed (step S1609), and the special electric accessory process is ended. In the round process, it is determined whether or not the round has ended, and at the end of the round, the round counter is decremented, and when the round counter reaches "0", an ending command is set and the jackpot end flag is turned ON.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 17: Step S1603).
In the game state setting process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a probability-variable jackpot (step S1901). If it is determined that it is a probability variation jackpot (step S1901: YES), the probability variation flag is turned on (step S1902), the probability variation counter is set to 30 (step S1903), and the process moves to step S1904. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a probability variable jackpot (step S1901: NO), the processing of steps S1902 and S1093 is not executed, and the process moves to step S1904.

In step S1904, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the time saving counter to "30" (step S1905).
Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag (step S1906), sets the ceiling counter (step S1907), sets the gaming state designation command (step S1908), and ends the gaming state setting process. .

8. Operation of the production control microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIGS. 19 to 25. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub control main processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main processing, the production control microcomputer 91 first performs initialization processing (step S4000). In the initialization process, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, reset of various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the initialization process, the performance control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4001), and performs the random number update process (step S4002). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value in the counter set area 94c (FIG. 6(B)) by adding "1". When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Furthermore, instead of adding up the random numbers one by one, two or more may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 allows the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4003). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4004) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19: step S4004). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4100). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variable production (step S4110). The fluctuating performance process is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during a fluctuating performance to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display performance. After the process during the variable performance, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4120). In the switch processing, the production control microcomputer 91 performs settings for the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output from the production button 63.

After the switch process, the production control microcomputer 91 executes a state transition process (step S4130). Details of the state transition process will be described later. After the state transition process, the production control microcomputer 91 executes the setting suggestion production process (step S4140). Details of the setting suggestion rendering process will also be described later.

After the setting suggestion production process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4150). In the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 sends various commands set in the production command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 by the received command analysis process to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute display effects according to the received commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes audio production to output audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received the various commands executes a lamp effect that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4160), and ends this process. Other processes include random number update processing and the like.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (step S4100 in FIG. 20). The performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a preliminary determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4180). If it has been received (step S4180: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4190). The "pre-reading effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern in the case of executing the pre-reading effect. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the pre-read performance random number, and performs the pre-read performance by referring to the acquired random number value and the pre-read performance pattern determination table stored in the sub ROM 93. Whether or not to do so, and a prefetch effect pattern in the case of performing a prefetch effect are determined. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4180: NO), the above-mentioned prefetch effect determination process is skipped. The look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that there is a high possibility that the pending information newly stored in the special figure pending storage area 84e includes a jackpot, and is executed during the variable performance.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a command for the number of reserved balls has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4200). If it has been received (step S4200: YES), a hold display process is performed (step S4210). In the hold display process, information is set in the counter set area 94c of the sub-RAM 94 based on information regarding the number of special figure 1 held balls, the number of special figure 2 held balls, and the number of normal pattern held balls included in the number of held balls command. The values of the first special symbol reservation performance counter, the second special symbol reservation performance counter, and the regular symbol reservation performance counter are updated. Thereby, information on each number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the pending pitch count command has not been received (step S4200: NO), the above-described pending display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4220). If it has been received (step S4220: YES), a variable effect start process is performed (step S4230). "Variation performance start processing" is a process of selecting a fluctuation performance pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. Details of the variable performance start process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4220: NO), the above-described variable effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4240). If it has been received (step S4240: YES), a variable effect end process is performed (step S4250). "Fluctuation performance end processing" is a process for stopping the fluctuation performance executed during special symbol fluctuation. In the fluctuating performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a counter etc. based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and also sets a fluctuating performance end command for ending the fluctuating performance. As a result, the effect pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 which is changing is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4240: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a winning related command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4260). The winning-related commands include a jackpot opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a small win opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, and the like. Here, if it has been received (step S4260: YES), a win-related effect pattern determination process corresponding to each command is performed (step S4270). For example, when receiving an opening command for a jackpot, select an opening production pattern preset corresponding to the jackpot type, and send an opening production start command to the sub RAM 94 to start the selected opening production. Set it in the production command set area 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (step S4130 in FIG. 18), the image control board 100 reads out a predetermined opening effect image, The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The same applies to other commands. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4260: NO), the process of step S4270 is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received an out number command from the main control board 80 (step S4280). If it is determined that the number-of-out command has been received (step S4280: YES), the number-of-out storage process is executed (step S4290), and the process moves to step S4300. The number-of-out storage process is a process for storing the number of outs included in the number-of-out command as state-related information in the suggested state storage area 94e of the sub-RAM 94. On the other hand, if it is determined that the out number command has not been received (step S4280: NO), the process of step S4290 is skipped. In step S4300, the production control microcomputer 91 executes other processes and ends the received command analysis process.

[State transition processing]
In order to facilitate understanding of the state transition process, the state of the setting suggestion effect will first be explained based on FIG. 22, and then the state transition process will be explained based on FIG. 23.
FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining the state of the setting suggestion effect. The states of the setting suggestion effect are "state 1 setting normal" (also simply referred to as "state 1"), "state 2 setting high certainty" (simply referred to as "state 2"), and "state 3 setting high confidence" (also simply referred to as "state 2"). There are four types: ``State 4 Setting High Confidence'' (also simply referred to as ``State 4''). These four states are caused to transition by various triggers (conditions). The setting suggestion performance in this embodiment is performed based on these four states.

As shown in FIG. 22, "state 1 setting normal" is a state in which the probability of occurrence of setting suggestion effects is low and the reliability of setting suggestion effects is low. "State 2: Setting Highly Accurate" is a state in which the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect is high and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is low. "State 3 Highly Confident Setting" is a state in which the probability of occurrence of setting suggestion performance is low and the reliability of setting suggestion performance is high. "State 4 High Setting Confidence" is a state in which the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion performance is high and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is high. Note that a state in which the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is high is a state in which the amount of information regarding setting determination obtained by one setting suggestion performance is large.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the state transition process (step S4130 in FIG. 20). The performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not the condition for increasing the status is satisfied (step S4401). If it is determined that the condition for status up is satisfied (step S4401: YES), status up processing is executed (step S4402), and the process moves to step S4403. Status up processing includes step up processing and jump up processing. In step-up processing, the state is increased by "1". In the jump-up process, the state is increased by "2" or more. This state is stored in the setting suggestion state storage area 94e of the sub-RAM 94 as a "setting suggestion production state." On the other hand, if it is determined that the status up condition is not satisfied (step S4401: NO), the process of step S4402 is not executed and the process moves to step S4403.

In step S4403, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether the condition for the state down is satisfied. If it is determined that the state down condition is satisfied (step S4403: YES), state down processing is executed (step S4404), and the state transition processing ends. The state down processing includes step down processing and jump down processing. In the step-down process, the state is lowered by "1". In the jump down process, the state is lowered by "2" or more. This state is stored in the setting suggestion state storage area 94e of the sub-RAM 94 as a "setting suggestion production state." On the other hand, if it is determined that the state down condition is not satisfied (step S4403: NO), the process of step S4404 is not executed and the state transition process is ended.

[Setting suggestion production decision processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the setting suggestion effect determination process (step S4140 in FIG. 20). The production control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not it is the setting suggestion timing (step S4501). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timing of the setting suggestion effect is determined in advance. For example, it is a predetermined timing in a variable production, or a start/end timing of a specific game state. If it is determined that it is now the setting suggestion timing (step S4501: YES), the process moves to step S4502. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the setting suggestion timing (step S4501: NO), the subsequent process is not executed and the suggestion effect determination process is ended.

In step S4502, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the state of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, the state of the setting suggestion effect is stored in the setting suggestion state storage area 94e of the sub-RAM 94 as "state of setting suggestion effect".
Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 refers to the setting suggestion production determination table (step S4503). The setting suggestion effect table will be described later.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect (step S4504). If it is determined here that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S4504: YES), a setting suggestion effect command is set (step S4505), and the setting suggestion effect determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is not to be executed (step S4505: NO), the process of step S4505 is not executed and the setting suggestion effect process is ended.

FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion effect table. FIG. 25(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion performance execution table, and FIG. 25(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion performance pattern table.
The setting suggestion effect execution table (FIG. 25(A)) is a table for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. In the setting suggestion effect determination process, the setting suggestion effect table is referred to (step S4503 in FIG. 24). First, the setting suggestion effect execution table (FIG. 25(A)) is referred to. Here, it is determined whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the state of the setting suggestion effect and the setting suggestion execution random number.

Specifically, when the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 1" or "state 3", the setting suggestion performance is executed if the value of the setting suggestion random number is between "0 to 12", and otherwise If so, the setting suggestion effect will not be executed. Also, if the setting suggestion effect is in "state 2" or "state 4", the setting suggestion effect is executed if the value of the setting suggestion random number is between 0 and 89, and otherwise. Does not perform setting suggestion effects. If it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S4504 in FIG. 24.

The setting suggestion effect pattern table (FIG. 25(B)) is a table for determining the content of the setting suggestion effect. In the setting suggestion effect determination process, when it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect, a setting suggestion effect command is set (step S4504 of FIG. 24: YES, step S4505). At this time, the setting suggestion effect command includes the content (pattern) of the setting suggestion effect, and the content is determined by the setting suggestion effect pattern table. Here, the content (pattern) of the setting suggestion performance is determined based on the state of the setting suggestion performance, setting information, and the setting suggestion performance pattern determination random number.

Specifically, when the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 1" or "state 2", one of patterns 1 to 6 is selected depending on the setting information and the value of the setting suggestion performance pattern determination random number. Pattern 1 has the content "Hmm, what do you think?" Pattern 2 has the message, "Just try a little harder!" Pattern 3 has the content "Maybe it's a good setting?!" Pattern 4 has the content, "That's quite a setting!" Pattern 5 has a content of "fair enough." Pattern 6 has the content "It's not bad!"

Further, when the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 3" or "state 4", one of patterns 7 to 13 is selected depending on the setting information and the value of the setting suggestion performance pattern determination random number. Pattern 7 has the content "Hmm, what do you think?" Pattern 8 says, ``Do your best!'' Pattern 9 has the content "Maybe it's a good setting?!" Pattern 10 has the content "Even number setting!". Pattern 11 has the content "Odd number setting!". Pattern 12 has the content "Setting 4 or higher is confirmed!" Pattern 13 has the content "Setting 5 or higher is confirmed!"
Although the detailed distribution based on the setting suggestion performance pattern determination random number value is omitted, it is conceivable that a plurality of patterns corresponding to the setting suggestion performance state and setting information are selected at the same ratio.

Thus, in states 3 and 4, the amount of information regarding setting determination obtained by the setting suggestion effect is larger than in states 1 and 2. That is, in states 3 and 4, a setting suggestion performance that allows the player to easily determine the setting is executed. For example, if the effect of pattern 10 is executed, the settings are narrowed down to settings 2, 4, or 6. For example, if the effect of pattern 11 is executed, the settings are narrowed down to settings 1, 3, and 5. For example, if the effect of pattern 12 is executed, the settings are narrowed down to any of settings 4 to 6. For example, if the effect of pattern 13 is executed, the settings are narrowed down to either setting 5 or 6. For example, if patterns 7 to 9 are executed in states 3 and 4, setting 1 is negated. Furthermore, by executing the setting suggestion effect multiple times, it may become possible to completely determine the setting. For example, if patterns 10 and 13 are executed, the settings will be narrowed down to setting 6. For example, if patterns 11 and 13 are executed, the settings are narrowed down to setting 5. For example, if it is determined that the state is higher than "state 3" by transitioning in the order of "state 1" → "state 2" → "state 3", if pattern 12 is executed, settings 4, 5, I can narrow it down to one of 6. For example, if it is determined that the state is higher than "state 3" by transitioning in the order of "state 1" → "state 3", if pattern 13 is executed, it will be narrowed down to either setting 5 or 6. It will be done.

Note that cards that briefly explain game specifications, performances, etc. are placed in the gaming machine 1, and booklets that briefly explain game specifications, performances, etc. are placed in the game hall (hall). In the explanations of such cards and booklets, the states of setting suggestion effects are referred to as states 1 to 4, in which the frequency (occurrence rate) of setting suggestion effects is associated with the reliability (reliability rate) of setting suggestion effects. Defined by four states that step up or jump up one by one (e.g., jump up from state 1 to state 3): state 1, state 2, state 3, and then state 4. It is stated that this changes the state of the setting suggestion effect, and it is also stated that a new game feature is given to the player in which he or she aims for state 4. The content described in the explanation of the card or booklet is also displayed on the demo screen for waiting for customers, which is the standby screen.

9. Production Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Modes of the Present Embodiment Below, production examples, effect examples, variations, and mode examples of the present embodiment will be described.
In this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the state of the setting suggestion effect (FIG. 22). In other words, it has a "state" for executing the setting suggestion effect, and by changing (transitioning) this state, the setting suggestion effect is made different. Specifically, the state of the setting suggestion performance can take four states, State 1 to State 4, depending on the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion performance and the degree of reliability. The closer the state is to state 4, the more advantageous setting discrimination becomes possible with the setting suggestion effect. As a result, in order to make the setting suggestion performance advantageous, a game feature is provided in which the player aims for state 4 as the state of the setting suggestion performance. A change (transition) in the state of the setting suggestion effect is performed in a state transition process (FIG. 23). In the state up process (step S4402), a transition is made from the first state of the setting suggestion presentation states to the second state in which the setting suggestion presentation can be an advantageous presentation for the player compared to the first state. ``A second state in which the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player compared to the first state'' is a case in which the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is higher compared to the first state, and also when the setting suggestion performance is more reliable than the first state. This includes cases in which it is advantageous for the player because the probability of occurrence of setting suggestion performance is increased. On the other hand, in the state down processing (step S4404), a transition is made from the second state to the first state. Below, specific examples of the status up condition in step S4401 and the status down condition in step S4403 will be described in detail.

In the state change performance of the setting suggestion performance, when performing the setting suggestion performance to suggest setting information to the player, the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion performance corresponds to the reliability level (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. The states of the attached setting suggestion effect are defined as four states, state 1 to state 4, and the state can be stepped up or jumped up one by one toward state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4. The state of the setting suggestion effect changes by jumping up from state 1 to state 3 (for example, jumping up from state 1 to state 3), and it gives the player a new game experience of aiming for state 4. . Of course, in addition to stepping up or jumping up one by one from state 1, state 2, state 3, and then towards state 4, the settings suggestion effect also includes stepping down one by one, It may also jump down (for example, jump down from state 3 to state 1).

State change effects A to C of setting suggestion effects will be explained using FIGS. 26 to 28. The state change performances A to C of the setting suggestion performance are performances accompanying a change in the state of the setting suggestion performance. Here, in particular, it is a production that explicitly or hints at the state of the setting suggestion production.

[Status change performance A of setting suggestion performance]
FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining state change effect A of the setting suggestion effect.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 26(A). The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1". Here, a dedicated background image SH1 indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(B), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop performance is a performance that causes the left center right performance symbol to temporarily stop. The effect pattern displayed in a temporary stop oscillates until it is displayed in a fixed stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as "5", the middle performance symbol 8C as "7", and the right performance symbol 8R as "4". Also here, a dedicated background image SH1 is displayed indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1."

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(C), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols that have been temporarily stopped to be displayed to be permanently stopped. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is "5", the middle performance symbol 8C is "7", and the right performance symbol 8R is "4", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the confirmed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect changes from "state 1" to "state 2." In order to understand this change, a dedicated background image SH2 is displayed indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2." Further, a status display JH "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(D), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, a dedicated background image SH2 indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(E), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that makes a suggestion based on setting information. In this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is an effect in which a setting suggestion image is displayed after the variation start effect (for example, one second later). Here, a setting suggestion image SS is displayed that says, "This is a great setting!" Further, a dedicated background image SH2 is displayed which indicates that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2."

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(F), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop performance is a performance that causes the left center right performance symbol to temporarily stop. The effect pattern displayed in a temporary stop oscillates until it is displayed in a fixed stop. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is "9", the middle presentation pattern 8C is "0", and the right presentation pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as "6". Also here, a dedicated background image SH2 is displayed indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2."

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(G), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols that have been temporarily stopped to be displayed to be permanently stopped. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is "9", the middle performance symbol 8C is "0", and the right performance symbol 8R is "6", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the confirmed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect changes from "state 2" to "state 3." In order to understand this change, a dedicated background image SH3 is displayed that indicates that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3." Further, a status display JH "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(H), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, a dedicated background image SH3 indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(I), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop performance is a performance that causes the left center right performance symbol to temporarily stop. The effect pattern displayed in a temporary stop oscillates until it is displayed in a fixed stop. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is "1", the middle presentation pattern 8C is "8", and the right presentation pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as "3". Also here, a dedicated background image SH3 is displayed indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3."

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(J), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols that have been temporarily stopped to be displayed to be permanently stopped. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is "1", the middle performance symbol 8C is "8", and the right performance symbol 8R is "3", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the confirmed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect changes from "state 3" to "state 4." In order to understand this change, a dedicated background image SH4 indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4" is displayed. Further, a status display JH "Status 4 Setting High Confidence" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(K), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, a dedicated background image SH4 indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(L), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that makes a suggestion based on setting information. In this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is an effect in which a message image is displayed after the variation start effect (for example, one second later). Here, a message image SS is displayed that says "Setting 5 or higher is confirmed!" Additionally, a dedicated background image SH4 is displayed that indicates that the setting suggestion effect is in "state 4."

[Status change performance B of setting suggestion performance]
FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining state change effect B of the setting suggestion effect. The state change performance B of the setting suggestion performance is another example of the state change performance A of the setting suggestion performance.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 27(A). The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1". Here, a status icon JI is displayed that includes a character string of "state 1" indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1."

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(B), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop performance is a performance that causes the left center right performance symbol to temporarily stop. The effect pattern displayed in a temporary stop oscillates until it is displayed in a fixed stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as "5", the middle performance symbol 8C as "7", and the right performance symbol 8R as "4". Here, too, a status icon JI including the character string "State 1" indicating that the state of the setting suggestion rendering is "State 1" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(C), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols that have been temporarily stopped to be displayed to be permanently stopped. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is "5", the middle performance symbol 8C is "7", and the right performance symbol 8R is "4", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the confirmed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect changes from "state 1" to "state 2." In order to understand this change, a status icon JI including the character string "State 2" indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "State 2" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(D), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, a status icon JI including the character string "State 2" indicating that the state of the setting suggestion rendering is "State 2" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(E), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that makes a suggestion based on setting information. In this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is an effect in which a setting suggestion image is displayed after the variation start effect (for example, one second later). Here, a setting suggestion image SS is displayed that says, "This is a great setting!" Further, a status icon JI including the character string "State 2" indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "State 2" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(F), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop performance is a performance that causes the left center right performance symbol to temporarily stop. The effect pattern displayed in a temporary stop oscillates until it is displayed in a fixed stop. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is "9", the middle presentation pattern 8C is "0", and the right presentation pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as "6". Here, too, a status icon JI including the character string "State 2" indicating that the state of the setting suggestion rendering is "State 2" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(G), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols that have been temporarily stopped to be displayed to be permanently stopped. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is "9", the middle performance symbol 8C is "0", and the right performance symbol 8R is "6", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the confirmed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect changes from "state 2" to "state 3." In order to understand this change, a status icon JI including the character string "State 3" indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "State 3" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(H), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, a status icon JI including the character string "State 3" indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "State 3" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(I), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop performance is a performance that causes the left center right performance symbol to temporarily stop. The effect pattern displayed in a temporary stop oscillates until it is displayed in a fixed stop. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is "1", the middle presentation pattern 8C is "8", and the right presentation pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as "3". Here, too, a status icon JI including the character string "State 3" indicating that the state of the setting suggestion rendering is "State 3" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(J), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols that have been temporarily stopped to be displayed to be permanently stopped. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is "1", the middle performance symbol 8C is "8", and the right performance symbol 8R is "3", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the confirmed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect changes from "state 3" to "state 4." In order to understand this change, a status icon JI including the character string "State 4" indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "State 4" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(K), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, a status icon JI including the character string "State 4" indicating that the state of the setting suggestion rendering is "State 4" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(L), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that makes a suggestion based on setting information. In this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is an effect in which a message image is displayed after the variation start effect (for example, one second later). Here, a message image SS is displayed that says "Setting 5 or higher is confirmed!" Further, a status icon JI including a character string of "state 4" indicating that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4" is displayed.

[Status change performance C of setting suggestion performance]
FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect C of the setting suggestion effect. The state change performance C of the setting suggestion performance is another example of the state change performance A and B of the setting suggestion performance.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 28(A). The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4". However, no display is made to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4."

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(B), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols that have been temporarily stopped to be displayed to be permanently stopped. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is "5", the middle performance symbol 8C is "7", and the right performance symbol 8R is "4", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the confirmed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion presentation remains unchanged. Further, no display is made to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4."

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(C), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Also at this time, no display is made to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4."

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(D), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols that have been temporarily stopped to be displayed to be permanently stopped. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is "0", the middle performance symbol 8C is "0", and the right performance symbol 8R is "4", which are fixed and stopped. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a manner (special eyes) corresponding to the state of the setting suggestion effect. The mode of "004" in the production pattern indicates that the state of the setting suggestion production is "state 4". In this embodiment, at the timing of the confirmed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion presentation remains unchanged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(E), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that makes a suggestion based on setting information. In this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is an effect in which a setting suggestion image is displayed after the variation start effect (for example, one second later). Here, a setting suggestion image SS that says "Even number confirmed!" is displayed. No display is made to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion presentation is "state 4."

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols that have been temporarily stopped to be displayed to be permanently stopped. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is "9", the middle performance symbol 8C is "0", and the right performance symbol 8R is "6", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the confirmed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion presentation remains unchanged. Further, no display is made to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4."

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(G), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Also at this time, no display is made to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4."

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(H), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols that have been temporarily stopped to be displayed to be permanently stopped. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is "0", the middle performance symbol 8C is "0", and the right performance symbol 8R is "4", which are fixed and stopped. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a manner (special eyes) corresponding to the state of the setting suggestion effect. The mode of "004" in the production pattern indicates that the state of the setting suggestion production is "state 4". In this embodiment, at the timing of the confirmed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion presentation remains unchanged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(I), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Here, no display is made to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4."

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(J), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols that have been temporarily stopped to be displayed to be permanently stopped. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is "2", the middle performance symbol 8C is "5", and the right performance symbol 8R is "6", which are fixed and stopped. In this embodiment, at the timing of the confirmed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion presentation remains unchanged. Furthermore, no display is made to indicate that the setting suggestion effect is in "state 4."

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(K), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that makes a suggestion based on setting information. In this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is an effect in which a message image is displayed after the variation start effect (for example, one second later). Here, a message image SS is displayed that says "Setting 5 or higher is confirmed!" No display is made to indicate that the state of the setting suggestion presentation is "state 4."

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(L), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols that have been temporarily stopped to be displayed to be permanently stopped. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is "0", the middle performance symbol 8C is "0", and the right performance symbol 8R is "3", which are fixed and stopped. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a manner (special eyes) corresponding to the state of the setting suggestion effect. The mode of "003" in the production pattern indicates that the state of the setting suggestion production is "state 3". In this embodiment, at the timing of the confirmed stop performance, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to change (transition) the state of the setting suggestion performance, and by winning the lottery, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed. Here, the state of the setting suggestion effect has changed from "state 4" to "state 3."

The state change performance C of the setting suggestion performance is different from the state change performances A and B of the setting suggestion performance that always clearly indicate the state of the setting suggestion performance. In the state change performance C of the setting suggestion performance, the state of the setting suggestion performance is indicated by stopping the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in a manner (special eyes) corresponding to the state of the setting suggestion performance. When the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 1", the performance pattern is stopped at "001". Further, when the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 2", the performance pattern is stopped at "002".

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.

[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a setting suggestion effect is executed that makes a suggestion based on setting information (FIGS. 26(E)(L), FIGS. 27(E)(L), FIGS. 28(E)(K)). . The gaming machine 1 has a plurality of settings suggestion performance states in which the settings regarding the setting suggestion performance are different from each other, and the setting suggestion performance is executed based on the state of the setting suggestion performance (FIG. 22). The state of the setting suggestion effect changes depending on the establishment of a specific condition (FIG. 23). According to this configuration, by introducing the concept of the state of the setting suggestion performance and changing (transitioning) the state of the setting suggestion performance, it is possible to realize an unprecedented setting suggestion performance and improve the interest of the game. be able to. Note that the state of the setting suggestion performance corresponds to a "setting suggestion performance state."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the state of the setting suggestion performance includes a plurality of states in which at least one of the execution frequency (probability of occurrence) of the setting suggestion performance and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance differs from each other (FIG. 22). . According to this configuration, by changing the state of the setting suggestion performance, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance or the reliability of the setting suggestion performance changes, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the setting suggestion performance state includes a setting normal state where the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low, and a setting suggestion performance state where the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low. a high setting confidence state where the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low; a high setting confidence state where the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively high; There are four states including a setting high confidence state in which the execution frequency is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively high (FIG. 22). According to this configuration, since the execution frequency and reliability of the setting suggestion performance are changed by changing the state of the setting suggestion performance, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Specifically, when the reliability of the setting suggestion performance increases, the amount of information regarding setting determination obtained by one setting suggestion performance increases. For example, as in pattern 12 in FIG. 25, "Settings 4 or higher are confirmed!" sets 4 to 6 to be confirmed. For example, as in pattern 13, "Settings 5 or more are confirmed!", settings 5 and 6 are confirmed. For example, in the case of setting 1 in a state where reliability is high, patterns 8 and 9 are not selected. Therefore, the pattern selected when the reliability is high also helps in setting determination.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, dedicated background images SH1 to SH4 corresponding to four states of setting suggestion effects are displayed (FIG. 26). According to this configuration, the state of the setting suggestion performance and its changes can be easily understood by the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that the dedicated background images SH1 to SH4 correspond to "background images".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, status icons JI corresponding to four statuses of the setting suggestion performance are displayed (FIG. 27). According to this configuration, the state of the setting suggestion performance and its changes can be easily understood by the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that the status icon JI corresponds to an "icon image".

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, performance symbols can be displayed in modes corresponding to four states of setting suggestion performance (FIGS. 28(D), (H), and (L)). Specifically, when the state is 1, the special eye is "001", when the state is 2, the special eye is "002", when the state is 3, the special eye is "003", and when the state is 4, the special eye is "002". In some cases, the frequency of stopping at the special number "004" increases. According to this configuration, since the state of the setting suggestion performance is not always displayed, the player can enjoy knowing the state of the setting suggestion performance more and can improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
A modification of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
It is conceivable that the change in the state of the setting suggestion performance increases one by one (step-up). For example, state 1→state 2, state 2→state 3, state 3→state 4, and so on. However, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the state increases by two or more (jumps up), such as from state 1 to state 3, state 1 to state 4, and state 2 to state 4.

[Modification 2]
It is conceivable that the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed one by one (step-down). For example, state 4→state 3, state 3→state 2, state 2→state 1, and so on. However, it may be configured to jump down two or more times, for example, from state 4 to state 1, from state 3 to state 1, from state 4 to state 2, and so on.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the dedicated background images SH1 to SH4 and the status icon JI are always displayed. On the other hand, the dedicated background images SH1 to SH4 and the status icon JI may be displayed at a constant frequency, similar to the display of the special eyes. In this case, since the state of the setting suggestion performance is not always displayed, the player can enjoy knowing the state of the setting suggestion performance more and can improve the interest of the game.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the state of the setting suggestion performance is shown using the dedicated background images SH1 to SH4, the status icon JI, or the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. On the other hand, music suggesting the state of the setting suggestion presentation may be output. For example, the BGM during a normal game is set to the BGM corresponding to the state of the setting suggestion performance.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect 1-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a drawing with a drawing probability according to the setting information when drawing a drawing when a game ball enters,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that makes suggestions based on the setting information,
having a plurality of setting suggestion presentation states in which settings regarding the setting suggestion presentation are different from each other;
The setting suggestion performance is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states,
The plurality of setting suggestion presentation states transition according to the establishment of a specific condition;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1-1,
The plurality of setting suggestion presentation states are different from each other in at least one of the execution frequency of the setting suggestion presentation and the reliability of the setting suggestion presentation,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1-2,
In the setting suggestion production state,
a setting normal state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low;
a high setting certainty state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low;
a setting high confidence state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively high;
a setting high confidence state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively high;
It includes four states:
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-3,
It is possible to display a background image that suggests the setting-suggesting performance state;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-4,
It is possible to display an icon image suggesting the setting suggestion presentation state;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-5,
The production pattern can be displayed in a manner suggesting the setting suggestion production state;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-6,
It is possible to output music that suggests the setting-suggesting performance state;
A gaming machine characterized by:

State change effects D to F of setting suggestion effects will be explained using FIGS. 29 to 31. State change effects D to F are effects that change the state of the setting suggestion effect. In particular, a description will be given of a presentation that triggers a change (transition) in the state of the setting suggestion presentation.

[Status change performance D of setting suggestion performance]
FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect D of the setting suggestion effect.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 29(A). The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(B), a mission display effect is executed. The mission display performance is a performance that displays one mission from among a plurality of prepared missions. Here, a message image MS is displayed that says, "Reach with 7 within 3 rotations." This mission will be successful if you reach the "7" symbol during 3 rotations (variations).

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(C), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that permanently stops the fluctuating performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "5", the middle performance symbol 8C is "7", and the right performance symbol 8R is "4". The mission has not been accomplished here.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(D), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(E), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that permanently stops the fluctuating performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9", the middle performance symbol 8C is "0", and the right performance symbol 8R is "6". Once again, the mission has not been accomplished.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(F), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(G), a left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop production is a production in which the moving speed of the left production symbol 8L gradually slows down and the left production symbol 8L stops. Here, the left production symbol 8L has stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(H), a reach promotion effect is executed. The reach stimulation performance is a performance in which the moving speed of the right performance symbol 8R gradually slows down to stimulate whether or not to form a reach mode. Here, the "7" symbol as the right effect symbol 8R is shown moving slowly downward as shown by the arrow Y, while inciting whether or not to form a ready-to-reach mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(I), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance that forms a reach mode by stopping the right performance pattern 8R at a pattern similar to the left performance pattern 8L. Here, the right presentation pattern 8R is stopped at the "7" pattern similar to the left presentation pattern 8L. At this time, since the mission was accomplished in exactly three rotations, a message image MS saying "Mission Success!" is displayed. Further, due to the success of this mission, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 3" to "state 4". Therefore, the status icon JI including the character string "Status 4" is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(J), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that makes a suggestion based on setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS saying "Setting 5 or higher is confirmed!" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. This shows that the setting of gaming machine 1 is either setting 5 or setting 6. At this time, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both "7", and the medium performance symbol 8C is changing at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(K), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the confirmation of a jackpot. Here, a message image MS saying "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(L), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are fixed and stopped at "7".

In this way, in the state change performance D of the setting suggestion performance, the state of the setting suggestion performance changes (transitions) by accomplishing the mission displayed in the mission display performance.

[Status change performance E of setting suggestion performance]
FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect E of the setting suggestion effect.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 30(A). The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. In addition, character images of "Takasatsu" and "Takashin" are displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and a gauge image of three squares is displayed on the right side of each character image. Hereinafter, the upper character image and gauge image will also be referred to as a "high-accuracy gauge." Furthermore, the lower character image and gauge image are also referred to as a "high confidence gauge." The high accuracy gauge and high confidence gauge are similarly displayed below. Note that at this time, the state of the setting suggestion performance is assumed to be "state 1."

In addition, in this embodiment, each time the "7" symbol stops on the medium performance symbol 8C in the losing mode, either the high accuracy gauge or the high confidence gauge increases by 1 memory. When the high accuracy gauge becomes full (3 memories), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) to "state 2". When the high confidence gauge becomes full (3 memories), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) to "state 3". When the high accuracy gauge and the high confidence gauge become full (3 memories), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) to "state 4". Each time the setting suggestion effect is executed, either the high accuracy gauge or the high confidence gauge is decreased by one memory. Then, when the high confidence gauge reaches "0" while the high confidence gauge remains, the state changes (transitions) to "state 3". When the high confidence gauge reaches "0" while the high confidence gauge remains, the state changes (transitions) to "state 2". When both the high accuracy gauge and the high confidence gauge reach "0", the state changes (transitions) to "state 1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(B), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9", the middle performance symbol 8C is "7", and the right performance symbol 8R is "2". Then, when the medium performance symbol 8C becomes a "7" symbol in this way, points are added. Specifically, the message image MS "Get points" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a in accordance with the final stop display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The memory of the high-accuracy gauge has been increased by 1 (shown by hatching).

Each time such variable display of performance symbols is repeated and the "7" symbol stops on the medium performance symbol 8C, the high accuracy gauge or high confidence gauge increases. Here, when the "7" symbol stops, the high accuracy gauge and the high confidence gauge are alternately increased. The explanation will be continued assuming that both the high accuracy gauge and the high confidence gauge have 2 memories.

In FIG. 30(C), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, both the high accuracy gauge and the high confidence gauge have 2 memories.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(D), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "5", the middle performance symbol 8C is "7", and the right performance symbol 8R is "8". Then, when the medium performance symbol 8C becomes a "7" symbol in this way, points are added. Specifically, the message image MS "Get points" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a in accordance with the final stop display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The memory of the high-accuracy gauge has been increased by 1 (shown by hatching). As a result, the high accuracy gauge becomes full (3 memories), and the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 2". In order to understand this change, a status display JH "State 2!" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left-center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, the high accuracy gauge has 3 memories and the high confidence gauge has 2 memories.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "6", the middle performance symbol 8C is "7", and the right performance symbol 8R is "3". Then, when the medium performance symbol 8C becomes a "7" symbol in this way, points are added. Specifically, the message image MS "Get points" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a in accordance with the final stop display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The high confidence gauge has increased by 1 memory (shown by hatching). As a result, both the high accuracy gauge and the high confidence gauge become full (3 memories), and the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 2" to "state 4". In order to understand this change, a status display JH "Status 4!" is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(G), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that is executed following the fluctuation start performance and provides a suggestion based on setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, which says "Setting 5 or higher is confirmed!". This shows that the setting of gaming machine 1 is either setting 5 or setting 6. At this time, the high accuracy gauge is reduced by one memory due to the execution of the setting suggestion effect. Note that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(H), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed at "1", the middle performance symbol 8C is "4", and the right performance symbol 8R is fixed at "3". At this time, the high accuracy gauge has 2 memories and the high confidence gauge has 3 memories.

Each time such a variable display of performance symbols is repeated and a setting suggestion performance is executed following the variation start performance, the high accuracy gauge or high confidence gauge decreases. Here, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the high accuracy gauge and the high confidence gauge are alternately decreased. The explanation will be continued assuming that both the high accuracy gauge and the high confidence gauge are one memory.

In FIG. 30(I), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that is executed following the fluctuation start performance and provides a suggestion based on setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS "Maybe a good setting?!" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At this time, due to the execution of the setting suggestion effect, the high accuracy gauge decreases by one memory and becomes "0". Note that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(J), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed at "2", the middle performance symbol 8C is "4", and the right performance symbol 8R is fixed at "6". At this time, the high accuracy gauge is "0" and the high confidence gauge is 1 memory. As a result, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 4" to "state 3". In order to understand this change, a status display JH "State 3!" is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 30(K), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that is executed following the fluctuation start performance and provides a suggestion based on setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS saying "Odd number confirmed!" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. This shows that the setting of gaming machine 1 is setting 5. At this time, due to the execution of the setting suggestion effect, the high confidence gauge decreases by 1 memory and becomes "0". Note that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(L), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed at "1", the middle performance symbol 8C is "5", and the right performance symbol 8R is fixed at "0". At this time, both the high accuracy gauge and the high confidence gauge are "0". As a result, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 3" to "state 1." In order to understand this change, a status display JH "Status 1!" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

[Status change performance F of setting suggestion performance]
FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect F of the setting suggestion effect.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 31(A). The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Further, a character image of "Point" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a, and a gauge image of three squares is displayed on the right side of the character image. Hereinafter, the character image and the gauge image will also be referred to as a "point gauge." The point gauge is displayed similarly below. Note that at this time, the state of the setting suggestion performance is assumed to be "state 1."

In this embodiment, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) to "state 2" when the point gauge reaches 1 memory. Furthermore, when the point gauge reaches 2 memories, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) to "state 3". Furthermore, when the point gauge reaches 3 memories, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) to "state 4". Points are added when the "7" symbol stops on the medium performance symbol 8C, and the point gauge increases by 1 memory. On the other hand, points are subtracted by executing a setting suggestion effect, and the point gauge decreases by one memory.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(B), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9", the middle performance symbol 8C is "7", and the right performance symbol 8R is "2". Then, when the medium performance symbol 8C becomes a "7" symbol in this way, points are added. Specifically, the message image MS "Get points" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a in accordance with the final stop display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The point gauge has increased by 1 memory (shown by hatching). As a result, the point gauge becomes one memory, and the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 2". In order to understand this change, a status display JH "State 2!" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, in FIG. 31(C), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, the point gauge has 1 memory.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(D), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "5", the middle performance symbol 8C is "7", and the right performance symbol 8R is "8". Then, when the medium performance symbol 8C becomes a "7" symbol in this way, points are added. Specifically, the message image MS "Get points" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a in accordance with the final stop display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The point gauge has increased by 1 memory (shown by hatching). As a result, the point gauge becomes 2 memories, and the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 2" to "state 3". In order to understand this change, a status display JH "State 3!" is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, in FIG. 31(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, the point gauge has 2 memories.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "6", the middle performance symbol 8C is "7", and the right performance symbol 8R is "3". Then, when the medium performance symbol 8C becomes a "7" symbol in this way, points are added. Specifically, the message image MS "Get points" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a in accordance with the final stop display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The point gauge has increased by 1 memory (shown by hatching). As a result, the point gauge becomes 3 memories, and the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 3" to "state 4". In order to understand this change, a status display JH "Status 4!" is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(G), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that is executed following the fluctuation start performance and provides a suggestion based on setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, which says "Setting 5 or higher is confirmed!". This shows that the setting of gaming machine 1 is either setting 5 or setting 6. At this time, the point gauge has decreased by one memory due to the execution of the setting suggestion effect. Note that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(H), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed at "1", the middle performance symbol 8C is "4", and the right performance symbol 8R is fixed at "3". At this time, the point gauge has 2 memories. As a result, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 4" to "state 3". In order to understand this change, a status display JH "State 3!" is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(I), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that is executed following the fluctuation start performance and provides a suggestion based on setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS "Maybe a good setting?!" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At this time, due to the execution of the setting suggestion effect, the high accuracy gauge decreases by 1 memory and becomes 1 memory. In addition, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(J), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed at "2", the middle performance symbol 8C is "4", and the right performance symbol 8R is fixed at "6". At this time, the high accuracy gauge has 1 memory. As a result, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 3" to "state 2." In order to understand this change, a status display JH "State 2!" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(K), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that is executed following the fluctuation start performance and provides a suggestion based on setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS saying "Odd number confirmed!" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. This shows that the setting of gaming machine 1 is setting 5. At this time, the point gauge decreases by 1 memory and becomes "0" due to the execution of the setting suggestion effect. Note that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(L), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed at "1", the middle performance symbol 8C is "5", and the right performance symbol 8R is fixed at "0". At this time, the point gauge is "0". As a result, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 2" to "state 1." In order to understand this change, a status display JH "Status 1!" is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a setting suggestion effect is executed that makes a suggestion based on setting information (FIG. 29(J)). The gaming machine 1 has a plurality of settings suggestion performance states in which the settings regarding the setting suggestion performance are different from each other, and the setting suggestion performance is executed based on the state of the setting suggestion performance (FIG. 22). Here, in particular, it is possible to execute a mission performance that becomes successful by accomplishing the presented mission, and when the mission performance is successful, the state of the setting suggestion performance (setting suggestion performance state) is changed from the first state to the first state. A transition is made to a second state in which the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player (FIGS. 29(B) to (I)). Specifically, in FIG. 29(I), when the mission performance is successful, the state of the setting suggestion performance changes (transitions) from "state 3" to "state 4". Therefore, "state 3" as a state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and "state 4" corresponds to the "second state". According to this configuration, the mission performance becomes an important performance that leads to setting determination, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a setting suggestion effect is executed that makes a suggestion based on setting information (FIG. 30(G)(I)(K), FIG. 31(G)(I)(K)). The gaming machine 1 has a plurality of setting suggestion performance states in which the settings regarding the setting suggestion performance are different from each other, and the setting suggestion performance is executed based on the state of the setting suggestion performance (FIG. 22). In particular, it is possible to execute a point addition effect that adds specific points, and when the points meet a predetermined condition, the state of the setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect state) is changed from the first state to the first state. A transition is made to a second state in which the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player (FIGS. 30(D)(F), FIGS. 31(B)(D)(F)). For example, in FIG. 30(D), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 2." Therefore, "state 1" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and "state 2" corresponds to the "second state". For example, in FIG. 30(F), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 2" to "state 4." Therefore, "state 2" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and "state 4" corresponds to the "second state". For example, when FIGS. 30(D) and 30(F) are combined, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 4." Therefore, "state 1" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and "state 4" corresponds to the "second state". The same applies to FIGS. 31(B), (D), and (F). According to this configuration, the point addition performance becomes an important performance that leads to setting determination, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a point subtraction effect in which points are subtracted, and when the points meet a predetermined condition, the state of the setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect state) can be changed from the second state to the first state. (Fig. 30 (J) (L), Fig. 31 (H) (J) (L)). For example, in FIG. 30(J), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 4" to "state 3." Therefore, "state 4" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "second state", and "state 3" corresponds to the "first state". For example, in FIG. 30(L), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 3" to "state 1." Therefore, "state 3" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "second state", and "state 1" corresponds to the "first state". For example, when FIGS. 30(J) and (L) are combined, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 4" to "state 1." Therefore, "state 4" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "second state", and "state 1" corresponds to the "first state". The same applies to FIGS. 31(H), (J), and (L). According to this configuration, changes (transitions) in the state of the setting suggestion performance can be easily understood in association with points, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the point subtraction performance is executed in response to the execution of the setting suggestion performance (FIG. 30(G)(I)(K), FIG. 31(G)(I)(K)). According to this configuration, the setting suggestion performance can be reliably executed in each state of the setting suggestion performance, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the point addition process is executed upon execution of a predetermined effect (FIGS. 30(B)(D)(F), FIG. 31(B)(D)(F)). According to this configuration, the predetermined performance becomes an important performance that leads to setting determination, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the confirmed stop performance in a loss mode in which the medium performance symbol 8C becomes a "7" symbol corresponds to a "predetermined performance."

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, points are displayed as a gauge image (FIGS. 30 and 31). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the increase and decrease of points, and in turn, it becomes easy to understand the change (transition) in the state of the setting suggestion performance, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
A modification of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
It is conceivable that the change in the state of the setting suggestion performance increases one by one (step-up). For example, state 1→state 2, state 2→state 3, state 3→state 4, and so on. However, it may be configured to jump up by two or more, for example, from state 1 to state 3, from state 1 to state 4, from state 2 to state 4, and so on.

[Modification 2]
It is conceivable that the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed one by one (step-down). For example, state 4→state 3, state 3→state 2, state 2→state 1, and so on. However, it may be configured to jump down two or more times, for example, from state 4 to state 1, from state 3 to state 1, from state 4 to state 2, and so on.

[Modification 3]
The above embodiment has a configuration in which a point addition effect is performed when the "7" symbol stops on the medium effect pattern 8C. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which point addition processing is performed by achieving a mission performance as shown in FIG. 29.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the mission performance "reach with 7 within 3 rotations" was exemplified, but various mission performances can be selectively used. Specifically, it may be a mission presentation that the player can accomplish on his or her own. Examples include ``Make 200 revolutions within an hour'', ``Make 300 revolutions in a row without waiting for a customer'', ``Press the button at the right time'', etc. Alternatively, it may be a mission performance related to main control. For example, "catch the jackpot within 100 spins" is given. Furthermore, it may be a mission presentation related to sub-control. For example, make a specific notice appear.

[Modification 5]
In the embodiment described above, the point subtraction effect is executed in response to the execution of the setting suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, similar to the point addition performance, the point subtraction performance may be performed using the mission performance as an opportunity.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect 2-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a drawing with a drawing probability according to the setting information when drawing a drawing when a game ball enters,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that makes suggestions based on the setting information,
having a plurality of setting suggestion presentation states in which settings regarding the setting suggestion presentation are different from each other;
The setting suggestion performance is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states,
It is possible to execute a point addition effect that adds a specific point, and when the points satisfy a predetermined condition after the point addition effect, the first state of the setting suggestion effect state is compared with the first state. Transitioning to a second state in which the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 2-1,
A point subtraction effect for subtracting the points can be executed, and when the points satisfy a predetermined condition after the point subtraction effect, the setting suggestion effect state transitions from the second state to the first state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 2-2,
The point subtraction performance is executed in response to the execution of the setting suggestion performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-3,
The point addition performance is executed in response to execution of a predetermined performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect 2-4,
The predetermined performance is a mission performance that becomes successful by achieving the presented mission,
When the mission performance is successful, the point addition performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-5,
displaying the points as a gauge image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 2-7]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a drawing with a lottery probability according to the setting information when drawing a drawing when game balls enter the game,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that makes suggestions based on the setting information,
having a plurality of setting suggestion presentation states in which settings regarding the setting suggestion presentation are different from each other;
The setting suggestion performance is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states,
It is possible to execute a mission production that becomes a success by completing the presented mission,
When the mission presentation is successful, the first state of the setting suggestion presentation states transitions to a second state in which the setting suggestion presentation can be an advantageous presentation for the player compared to the first state;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The state change effects G to I of the setting suggestion effect will be explained using FIGS. 32 to 34. The state change effects G to I are effects that change the state of the setting suggestion effect. In particular, an example will be shown in which the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed (transitioned) in response to the result of a lottery.

[Status change performance G of setting suggestion performance]
FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect G of the setting suggestion effect. The state change performance G of the setting suggestion performance is an example in which the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed (transitioned) when the performance is a so-called extremely hot performance but ends up being a loss.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 32(A). The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 32(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols form a reach mode. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both "5", and the medium performance symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32(C), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MS of "Development Strongest Battle Reach" is displayed. Also, a reliability display SD of the star-shaped image is displayed. The reliability here is 4 out of 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32(D), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. Here, if the friendly character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot. On the other hand, if the friendly character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB, the game is a loss.

If the lottery result is a loss, a defeat effect is performed as shown in FIG. 32(E). The defeat performance is a performance when the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB. Here, an enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, a message image MS saying "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are fixed at "5" and the middle performance symbol 8C is fixed at "6". In this way, when the lottery result is a loss and the specific performance is executed, the state of the setting suggestion performance changes (transitions). In order to understand this change, a status display JH "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

[Status change performance H of setting suggestion performance]
FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect H of the setting suggestion effect. The state change performance H of the setting suggestion performance is an example of changing (transitioning) the state of the setting suggestion performance when a non-probable normal jackpot occurs.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 33(A). The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 33(B), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that makes a suggestion based on setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS "fair enough" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 33(C), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols form a reach mode. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both "6", and the middle performance symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 33(D), a medium symbol low speed fluctuation effect is executed. The medium symbol low speed fluctuation performance is a performance in which the medium performance symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol, moves at a low speed. Here, the "6" symbol as the middle effect symbol 8C is shown moving as shown by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 33(E), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot guaranteed performance is a performance that guarantees a jackpot. Here, a message image MS saying "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 33(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all fixed and stopped at "6". It is assumed that the jackpot with the "6" symbol is an "8R normal jackpot" (FIG. 8). In this way, when the lottery result is a win and the special symbol determined in conjunction with the lottery is a specific winning symbol, the state of the setting suggestion performance changes (transitions). In order to understand this change, a status display JH "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

[Status change performance I of setting suggestion performance]
FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect I of the setting suggestion effect. The state change performance I of the setting suggestion performance is an example of changing (transitioning) the state of the setting suggestion performance when a specific type of loss occurs.
The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 34(A). The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 34(B), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that makes a suggestion based on setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS saying "Even number confirmed!" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34(C), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols form a reach mode. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both "6", and the medium performance symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34(D), a medium symbol low speed fluctuation effect is executed. The medium symbol low speed fluctuation performance is a performance in which the medium performance symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol, moves at a low speed. Here, the "6" symbol as the middle effect symbol 8C is shown moving as shown by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34(E), a medium symbol low speed fluctuation effect is executed. The medium symbol low speed fluctuation performance is a performance in which the medium performance symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol, moves at a low speed. Here, the "7" symbol as the middle effect symbol 8C is shown moving as indicated by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that causes the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to come to a definite stop. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are fixed and stopped at "6", and the middle production symbol 8C is fixed and stopped at "7". In this way, when the lottery result is a loss and the special symbol determined in conjunction with the lottery is a specific loss symbol, the state of the setting suggestion performance changes (transitions). In order to understand this change, a status display JH "Status 4 Setting High Confidence" is displayed at the bottom right of the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a setting suggestion effect is executed that makes a suggestion based on setting information (FIGS. 33(B) and 34(B)). The gaming machine 1 has a plurality of settings suggestion performance states in which the settings regarding the setting suggestion performance are different from each other, and the setting suggestion performance is executed based on the state of the setting suggestion performance (FIG. 22). In particular, based on the result of the lottery, a transition process is executed to transition from the first state to the second state where the setting suggestion performance can be more advantageous for the player compared to the first state (FIG. 32(F) , FIG. 33(F), FIG. 34(F)). For example, in FIG. 32(F), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 2." Therefore, "state 1" as a state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and "state 2" corresponds to the "second state". For example, in FIG. 33(F), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 2" to "state 3." Therefore, "state 2" as a state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and "state 3" corresponds to the "second state". For example, in FIG. 34(F), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 3" to "state 4." Therefore, "state 3" as a state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and "state 4" corresponds to the "second state". According to this configuration, the result of a lottery such as a jackpot is given importance in determining settings, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the transition process is performed when the result of the lottery is a loss and a specific effect is executed in notification of the result of the lottery (FIG. 32). At this time, the specific performance is a performance with a relatively high degree of reliability for a jackpot (a performance with the highest battle reach). According to this configuration, even if the player loses with a performance with a relatively high degree of reliability, it can be expected that the player will be in an advantageous state in determining the settings, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the transition process is performed when the lottery result is a loss and the special symbol determined in conjunction with the lottery is a specific losing symbol (FIG. 34). According to this configuration, even if there is a change in the normal loss, it can be expected that the setting will be in an advantageous state in determining the setting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the transition process is performed when the lottery result is a win and the special symbol determined in conjunction with the lottery is a specific winning symbol (FIG. 33). According to this configuration, even if it is a non-probable jackpot, for example, it can be expected that the setting will be in an advantageous state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modification of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
It is conceivable that the change in the state of the setting suggestion performance increases one by one (step-up). For example, state 1→state 2, state 2→state 3, state 3→state 4, and so on. However, it may be configured to jump up by two or more, for example, from state 1 to state 3, from state 1 to state 4, from state 2 to state 4, and so on.

[Modification 2]
It is conceivable that the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed one by one (step-down). For example, state 4→state 3, state 3→state 2, state 2→state 1, and so on. However, it may be configured to jump down two or more times, for example, from state 4 to state 1, from state 3 to state 1, from state 4 to state 2, and so on.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, in the case of a specific jackpot, the state of the setting suggestion effect is changed (transitioned) (FIG. 33). On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the state of the setting suggestion effect is changed (transitioned) in the case of a specific small win. That is, the transition process may be performed when the lottery result is a loss and the special symbol determined in conjunction with the lottery is a specific small winning symbol. According to this configuration, even if it is a small win that does not lead to a jackpot in a game machine of type 2, for example, it can be expected to be in an advantageous state in setting determination, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, when the strongest battle reach performance results in a loss, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed (transitioned) (FIG. 32). In addition to this, a configuration is conceivable in which the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed (transitioned) when the extremely hot performance results in a loss. For example, it is conceivable that the player loses because of the extremely hot preview effect among the preview effects, or the case where the user loses because a very hot pattern appears.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed (transitioned) in the case of a non-probable regular jackpot (FIG. 33). In addition to this, a configuration may be considered in which the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed (transitioned) in the event of a jackpot under a specific situation. For example, it is conceivable that the player wins a jackpot for the first time without any time savings, or that he or she normally hits the jackpot during the time savings.

[Modification 6]
The above embodiment has a configuration in which the state of the setting suggestion effect is stepped up. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which step-down (or jump-down) is performed under similar conditions. For example, if the result of the lottery is a loss and the special symbol determined in conjunction with the lottery is a specific losing symbol, step up; If the special symbol determined by the above is a specific winning symbol, the game is stepped down. For example, if the result of a lottery is a loss and the special symbol determined by the lottery is a specific losing symbol, a further lottery may be conducted and the step-up or step-down may be performed based on the result. Good too.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect 3-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a drawing with a lottery probability according to the setting information when drawing a drawing when game balls enter the game,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that makes suggestions based on the setting information,
having a plurality of setting suggestion presentation states in which settings regarding the setting suggestion presentation are different from each other;
The setting suggestion performance is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states,
At least based on the result of the lottery, a transition process is performed for transitioning from a first state of the setting suggestion presentation states to a second state in which the setting suggestion presentation can be an advantageous presentation for the player compared to the first state. is practicable,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 3-1,
The transition process is performed when the result of the lottery is a loss and a specific effect is executed in announcing the result of the lottery.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 3-1 or aspect 3-2,
The transition process is performed when the result of the lottery is a loss and the special symbol determined in conjunction with the lottery is a specific loss symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-3,
The transition process is performed when the result of the lottery is a loss and the special symbol determined by the lottery is a specific small winning symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-4,
The transition process is performed when the result of the lottery is a win and the special symbol determined by the lottery is a specific winning symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-5,
The transition process also includes a transition from the second state to the first state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

State change effects J to L of setting suggestion effects will be explained using FIGS. 35 to 37. The state change effects J to L are effects that change the state of the setting suggestion effect. In particular, an example will be described in which the number of successive jackpots and the history of jackpots trigger a change (transition) in the state of the setting suggestion performance.

[Status change performance J of setting suggestion performance]
FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect J of the setting suggestion effect. The state change performance J of the setting suggestion performance is a performance that changes (transitions) the state of the setting suggestion performance according to the number of successive jackpots. In particular, an example will be shown in which the state of the setting suggestion effect is changed (transitioned) in response to notification of a jackpot.

The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 35(A). The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols form a reach mode. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both "5", and the medium performance symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(C), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that permanently stops the fluctuating performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right all stop at "5" and notify that it is a jackpot. It is assumed that the jackpot with the "5" symbol is a 4R probability-variable jackpot (FIG. 8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification performance is a performance to notify that a jackpot has been won. Here, a message image MS saying "Jackpot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Subsequently, a jackpot game is executed. The jackpot game is a game that is played by hitting the ball right-handed, and it is possible to win more game balls than usual by landing the game ball in the big winning hole 30. The explanation will be continued on the assumption that after the jackpot game, the state shifts to a variable probability gaming state (high probability high base state).

In FIG. 35(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbol starts to fluctuate. It is assumed that this variation start performance is a variation of the number of rotations in the variable probability game state. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that permanently stops the fluctuating performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right all stop at "7" and notify that it is a jackpot. It is assumed that the jackpot with the "7" symbol is an 8R probability-variable jackpot (FIG. 8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(G), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification performance is a performance to notify that a jackpot has been won. Here, a message image MS saying "2nd Jackpot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the state of the setting suggestion performance changes (transitions) due to two successive jackpots. In order to understand this change, a status display JH "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Subsequently, a jackpot game is executed. The jackpot game is a game that is played by hitting the ball right-handed, and it is possible to win more game balls than usual by landing the game balls in the big winning hole 30. The explanation will be continued on the assumption that after the jackpot game, a transition has been made to the variable probability gaming state (high probability high base state).

In FIG. 35(H), a variation start effect is executed. The variation start production is a production in which the production pattern on the left center right side starts to fluctuate. It is assumed that this variation start effect is a variation of the number of rotations in the variable probability gaming state. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(I), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that permanently stops the fluctuating performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right all stop at "7" and notify that it is a jackpot. It is assumed that the jackpot with the "7" symbol is an 8R probability-variable jackpot (FIG. 8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(J), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification performance is a performance to notify that a jackpot has been won. Here, a message image MS saying "3rd jackpot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The state of the setting suggestion performance changes (transitions) due to the triple jackpot. In order to understand this change, a status display JH "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Subsequently, a jackpot game is executed. The jackpot game is a game that is played by hitting the ball right-handed, and it is possible to win more game balls than usual by landing the game balls in the big winning hole 30. The explanation will be continued on the assumption that after the jackpot game, a transition has been made to the variable probability gaming state (high probability high base state).

In FIG. 35(K), a variation start effect is executed. The variation start production is a production in which the production pattern on the left center right side starts to fluctuate. It is assumed that this variation start effect is a variation of the number of rotations in the variable probability gaming state. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

In FIG. 35(L), a setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that makes a suggestion based on setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, which says "Setting 5 or higher is confirmed!". Thereby, it can be determined that the setting of the gaming machine 1 is setting 5 or setting 6.

[Status change performance K of setting suggestion performance]
FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect K of the setting suggestion effect. The state change performance K of the setting suggestion performance is a performance that changes (transitions) the state of the setting suggestion performance according to the number of successive jackpots. In particular, an example will be shown in which the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed (transitioned) at the end of an advantageous game after a jackpot.

The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 36(A). The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols form a reach mode. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both "5", and the medium performance symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(C), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that permanently stops the fluctuating performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right all stop at "5" and notify that it is a jackpot. It is assumed that the jackpot with the "5" symbol is a 4R probability-variable jackpot (FIG. 8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification performance is a performance to notify that a jackpot has been won. Here, a message image MS saying "Jackpot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Subsequently, a jackpot game is executed. The jackpot game is a game that is played by hitting the ball right-handed, and it is possible to win more game balls than usual by landing the game balls in the big winning hole 30. The explanation will be continued on the assumption that after the jackpot game, a transition has been made to the variable probability gaming state (high probability high base state).

In FIG. 36(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate. It is assumed that this variation start performance is a variation of the number of rotations in the variable probability game state. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that permanently stops the fluctuating performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right all stop at "7" and notify that it is a jackpot. It is assumed that the jackpot with the "7" symbol is an 8R probability-variable jackpot (FIG. 8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(G), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification performance is a performance to notify that a jackpot has been won. Here, a message image MS saying "2nd Jackpot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Subsequently, a jackpot game is executed. The jackpot game is a game that is played by hitting the ball right-handed, and it is possible to win more game balls than usual by landing the game balls in the big winning hole 30. The explanation will be continued on the assumption that after the jackpot game, a transition has been made to the variable probability gaming state (high probability high base state).

In FIG. 36(H), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left-center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate. It is assumed that this variation start effect is a variation of the number of rotations in the variable probability gaming state. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(I), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that permanently stops the fluctuating performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right all stop at "7" and notify that it is a jackpot. It is assumed that the jackpot with the "7" symbol is an 8R probability-variable jackpot (FIG. 8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(J), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification performance is a performance to notify that a jackpot has been won. Here, a message image MS saying "3rd jackpot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Subsequently, a jackpot game is executed. The jackpot game is a game that is played by hitting the ball right-handed, and it is possible to win more game balls than usual by landing the game balls in the big winning hole 30. The explanation will be continued on the assumption that after the jackpot game, a transition has been made to the variable probability gaming state (high probability high base state).

In FIG. 36(K), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that permanently stops the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right. This fixed stop performance corresponds to the final fluctuation in the fixed variable gaming state. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed at "9", the middle performance symbol 8C is "4", and the right performance symbol 8R is fixed at "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(L), a result effect is executed. The result performance is a performance that notifies the end of the variable game state and the number of consecutive jackpots. Here, a message image MS is displayed that says "Kakuhen ends 3 consecutive games". In addition, due to three successive jackpots, the state of the setting suggestion performance changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 3". In order to understand this change, a status display JH "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

[Status change performance L of setting suggestion performance]
FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining the state change effect L of the setting suggestion effect. The state change performance L of the setting suggestion performance is a performance that changes (transitions) the state of the setting suggestion performance by executing the setting suggestion performance a prescribed number of times.

The effect control microcomputer 91 first executes a variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 37(A). The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At this time, it is assumed that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(B), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that permanently stops the fluctuating performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "5", the middle performance symbol 8C is "7", and the right performance symbol 8R is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(C), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate. Further, here, following the variation start performance, a setting suggestion performance is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that makes a suggestion based on setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS is displayed that says "Maybe it's a good setting!". In addition, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right were shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(D), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that permanently stops the fluctuating performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed at "1", the middle performance symbol 8C is "4", and the right performance symbol 8R is fixed at "6".

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate. Further, here, following the variation start performance, a setting suggestion performance is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that makes a suggestion based on setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS that says "Even number confirmed!" is displayed. In addition, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right were shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that permanently stops the fluctuating performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9", the middle performance symbol 8C is "0", and the right performance symbol 8R is "6".

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(G), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate. Further, here, following the variation start performance, a setting suggestion performance is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that makes a suggestion based on setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS is displayed that says ``Setting 4 or higher is confirmed!''. In addition, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right were shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(H), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that permanently stops the fluctuating performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "5", the middle performance symbol 8C is "7", and the right performance symbol 8R is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(I), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(J), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that permanently stops the fluctuating performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "2", the middle performance symbol 8C is "5", and the right performance symbol 8R is "6".

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(K), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the left center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate. Further, here, following the variation start performance, a setting suggestion performance is executed. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that makes a suggestion based on setting information. Here, a setting suggestion image SS is displayed that says ``Setting 5 or higher is confirmed!''. As a result, the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect reaches the prescribed number of times of "4", so the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 4" to "state 3". In addition, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right were shown to be fluctuating at high speed. During high-speed fluctuation, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37(L), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance that permanently stops the fluctuating performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed at "2", the middle performance symbol 8C is "5", and the right performance symbol 8R is fixed at "6". Further, here, a status display JH of ``State 3 Setting High Confidence'' is displayed so that it can be seen that the state of the setting suggestion effect has changed (transitioned) to ``State 3''.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a setting suggestion effect is executed that makes a suggestion based on setting information (FIG. 35(L), FIG. 37(C)(E)(G)(K)). The gaming machine 1 has a plurality of setting suggestion performance states in which the settings regarding the setting suggestion performance are different from each other, and the setting suggestion performance is executed based on the state of the setting suggestion performance (FIG. 22). In particular, the history of the jackpot game executed based on the result of the lottery is stored, and based on the history of the jackpot game, the setting suggestion presentation is changed from the first state of the setting suggestion presentation states to the first state. It is possible to execute an upward transition process for transitioning to the second state, which can be an advantageous effect for the player (FIGS. 35(G)(J), FIG. 36(L)). For example, in FIG. 35(G), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 2." Therefore, "state 1" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and "state 2" corresponds to the "second state". For example, in FIG. 35(J), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 2" to "state 3." Therefore, "state 2" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and "state 3" corresponds to the "second state". For example, when FIGS. 35(G) and (J) are combined, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 3." Therefore, "state 1" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and "state 3" corresponds to the "second state". For example, in FIG. 36(L), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 1" to "state 3." Therefore, "state 1" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "first state", and "state 3" corresponds to the "second state". According to this configuration, in addition to consecutive jackpot games, there is a greater possibility that the determination of settings will be advantageous, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, when the number of successive jackpot games exceeds a predetermined number of times, upward transition processing is executed (FIGS. 35(G), (J), and FIG. 36(L)). According to this configuration, in addition to consecutive jackpot games, there is a greater possibility that the determination of settings will be advantageous, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a downward transition process for transitioning the setting suggestion performance state from the second state to the first state based on the history of setting suggestion performance (Fig. 37(C)(E)). G)(K)(L)). For example, in FIG. 37(L), the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (transitions) from "state 4" to "state 3." Therefore, "state 4" as the state of the setting suggestion effect corresponds to the "second state", and "state 3" corresponds to the "first state". According to this configuration, the setting suggestion performance can be reliably executed in each state of the setting suggestion performance, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the downward transition process is executed when the setting suggestion effect is executed four times based on the history of the setting suggestion effect (Fig. 37(C)(E)(G)(K)( L)). According to this configuration, the setting suggestion performance can be reliably executed in each state of the setting suggestion performance, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modification of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
It is conceivable that the change in the state of the setting suggestion performance increases one by one (step-up). For example, state 1→state 2, state 2→state 3, state 3→state 4, and so on. However, it may be configured to jump up by two or more, for example, from state 1 to state 3, from state 1 to state 4, from state 2 to state 4, and so on.

[Modification 2]
It is conceivable that the state of the setting suggestion performance is changed one by one (step-down). For example, state 4→state 3, state 3→state 2, state 2→state 1, and so on. However, it may be configured to jump down two or more times, for example, from state 4 to state 1, from state 3 to state 1, from state 4 to state 2, and so on.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the state of the setting suggestion effect is changed (transitioned) based on the number of successive jackpots. On the other hand, when a specific type of jackpot among the jackpots continues, the state of the setting suggestion performance may be changed (transitioned). For example, there may be cases where non-probable jackpots occur consecutively or cases where maximum round jackpots occur consecutively. At this time, not only so-called successive winnings may be counted as consecutive jackpots, but also jackpots with fluctuating performances in the normal gaming state (low probability, low base state) may be counted as consecutive jackpots.

[Modification 4]
In the embodiment described above, when the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect reaches the prescribed number of times of four, the state of the setting suggestion effect is lowered. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the prescribed number of times is dynamically changed. Specifically, it is conceivable to randomly set the prescribed number of times. It is also conceivable to set a prescribed number of times according to setting information. For example, in the case of setting 6, the prescribed number of times is set to a relatively large value.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect 4-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a drawing with a drawing probability according to the setting information when drawing a drawing when a game ball enters,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that makes suggestions based on the setting information,
having a plurality of setting suggestion presentation states in which settings regarding the setting suggestion presentation are different from each other;
The setting suggestion performance is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states,
A history of a jackpot game executed based on the result of the lottery is stored, and based on the history of the jackpot game, the setting suggestion performance is compared from a first state of the setting suggestion performance states to the first state. It is possible to execute upward transition processing to transition to a second state that can be an advantageous performance for the player,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 4-1,
Based on the history of the jackpot games, when the number of consecutive jackpot games exceeds a predetermined number, executing the upward transition process;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 4-1 or aspect 4-2,
Based on the history of the jackpot games, when jackpot games of a specific type among the jackpot games are executed consecutively, the upward transition process is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 4-1 to 4-3,
Based on the history of the setting suggestion presentation, it is possible to execute a downward transition process of transitioning the setting suggestion presentation state from the second state to the first state;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect 4-4,
executing the downward transition process when the setting suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times based on the history of the setting suggestion effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect 4-5,
The predetermined number of times is predetermined in correspondence with the setting information,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The state change effects M to O of the setting suggestion effects will be explained below using FIGS. 38 to 40. In FIGS. 38 to 40, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings. FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the state change performance M of the setting suggestion performance, FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance, and FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance. FIG.

As mentioned above, the state change performance of this setting suggestion performance is based on the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion performance and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance ( The states of the setting suggestion performance that are associated with (reliability rate) are defined as four states, state 1 to state 4, and the state is stepped up one by one toward state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4. The state of the setting suggestion effect changes by jumping up or jumping up (for example, jumping up from state 1 to state 3), creating a new game experience in which the player aims for state 4. It is intended to give. Of course, the states of the setting suggestion effect include, as mentioned above, in addition to stepping up or jumping up one by one from state 1, state 2, state 3, and then towards state 4. It may also step down or jump down (for example, jump down from state 3 to state 1).

The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a state change effect of the setting suggestion effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

Here, first, the state change performance M of the setting suggestion performance, the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance, and the state change performance O of the setting suggestion performance will be explained in order.

[Status change performance M of setting suggestion performance]
The state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 38. First, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the statically displayed performance symbols move slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode. Later on (in other words, after the static display of the performance design is released and the performance design is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), the speed gradually increases from low speed toward the bottom and changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state. The display mode changes to a transparent state and changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the performance pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production design decelerates just before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). . When the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, they move gradually and slowly in the vertical direction.

To briefly explain the fluctuating icons and pending icons, for example, as shown in FIGS. 38(A) and (J), the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol which are currently fluctuating as the expiry of the first special symbol reservation. The variable icon 9C corresponding to the symbol 8R is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second special figure reservation is provided. A second hold display area is provided as a second hold display area. In the first hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Ad. In the second hold display area, the hold icons 9B can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a so-called left-handed game), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is The 4 hold display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, while the 1st hold display position 9Bd to the 4th hold display position 9Bd of the hold icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the left-handed When playing a game, a hold icon 9B exists and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). In addition, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is played. 4. The hold display position 9Ad is hidden on the display screen 7a (of course, when playing the game of right-hand hitting, the hold icon 9A exists and is displayed on the display screen 7a until it is completed). Then, the first to fourth pending display positions 9Bd to 9Bd of the pending icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

After turning on the power of the gaming machine 1, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and there are no hits and losses in a row, and the production pattern is displayed only 49 times. The fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started and stopped, and the loss is confirmed.After that, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C. As shown in 38(A), a fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started. As a result, after the power is turned on, the rotation is being varied at the 50th rotation. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed.

After the power is turned on, when the 50th rotation is in progress, the status display of the setting suggestion effect is started as shown in FIG. ” is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. . The status display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 1 Setting Normal" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance is arranged on the near side of the variation area of the left production pattern 8L, the variation area of the middle production pattern 8C, and the variation area of the right production pattern 8R. As a result, although the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect overlaps with a part of the area on the right side of the fluctuation area of the left effect pattern 8L in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is the left effect. It is not obstructed by the symbol 8L and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is in a state where it straddles the fluctuation area of the medium effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction. Although it overlaps with the fluctuation area in the front and back direction, the setting suggestion effect status display image JM1 is not obstructed by the middle effect pattern 8C and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape of the setting suggestion effect status display image JM1 is similar to the right effect. Although it overlaps with a part of the left side of the variation area of the symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance is not obstructed by the right performance symbol 8R and is not difficult to see.

A state 1 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 1 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, and "state 1 settings" is placed in front of this state 1 display background image. An image of the text "Normal" is placed. The background image for displaying state 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1 setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a that corresponds to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 1 display background image. Note that the background image for displaying state 1 may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal." In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

When the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears), and the status display area JH is displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. When the character image "Normal" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the status display area JH, the text image "Normal" appears in the upper row of the status display area JH. In the lower row of the character image and status display area JH, a character image "220 times remaining" is displayed in upper and lower rows, respectively. In other words, in the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal", the information "Status 1" is reflected as is, but by switching from the information "Setting Normal" to the information "220 times remaining", the setting It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the suggestive performance will be displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 220 variable performances (variable displays). In the remaining 220 variable effects (variable displays), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, first, "state 1" is set as the state of the setting suggestion performance, and it is made clear to the player that "state 1" will remain.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect (reliability rate) are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

Although the status display area JH overlaps with the downstream side of the variation area of the right effect pattern 8R in the front-rear direction, the status display area JH is arranged at the frontmost side like the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, it is not obstructed by the right presentation pattern 8R and is not difficult to see. Further, a dedicated status display area background image (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the status display area JH. The background image for the status display area is opaque with a design and contrast set to improve the visibility of the text image "Status 1" and the text image "220 times left". . This makes it difficult to see the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH through the status display area background image. The background image for the status display area may be opaque to semi-transparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the text image "Status 1" and the text image "220 times left". It can also be used as a thing. In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH can be visually recognized through the status display area background image.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 38(C), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "2", and when the symbols with the same number do not line up, it is then stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable production (fluctuating display) of the production symbol starts. The remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is reduced by the value 1. In other words, each time the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH is decreased by the value 1 and counted down (219 times remaining). Note that when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, there are no pending icons 9A that are not digested and are stocked. It will be in a state where it does not.

A player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), and there are no hits and no losses, and only 99 times after the power is turned on (in other words, FIG. 38 In (B), the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed (Only 49 rotations after the end of the variation) The variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern is started and stopped, the loss is confirmed, and then the When the pending icon 9A displayed at the 1 pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol is started. As a result, the 100th revolution is in progress after the power is turned on (in other words, the 50th revolution is in progress after the end of the variation in which the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in FIG. 38(B)). ). Accordingly, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH becomes 170, and "170 times remaining" is displayed.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and there are only two hold icons 9A that are not digested and are stocked. .

After the power is turned on, when the 100th revolution is in progress, as shown in FIG. A status display image JM2 of a setting suggestion performance that can be performed (notification) is displayed (appears) in a horizontally long rectangular shape on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM2 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect has the same configuration as the state display image JM1 of the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 2 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 2 is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. On the front side of this background image for displaying state 2, a text image that reads "state 2 setting high accuracy" is arranged. The background image for displaying state 2 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy".

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image "Status Change". At this time, in this embodiment, the above-described background image for the status display area is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the status display area JH. Instead, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in state will occur.

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen, except for the character image "Condition 2 Setting High Accuracy". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears from 7a. At this time, the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing its size, the character image "Status Change" that was displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH. , a text image "Status 2" is displayed in the upper row of the status display area JH, and a text image "170 times remaining" is displayed in the lower row of the status display area JH, divided into upper and lower rows. In other words, in the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy", the information "Status 2" is reflected as is, but by switching from the information "Setting High Accuracy" to the information "Remaining 170 times", , it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance will be displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 170 variable performances (variable displays). In the remaining 170 variable effects (variable displays), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is clearly shown to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is transited to "state 2" and that "state 2" is to be stayed.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2," the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect (reliability rate) are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

Although the character image "Status Change" displayed in the status display area JH disappears, the background image for the status display area described above continues to be arranged in the status display area JH. Note that when the text image "Status Change" is displayed in the status display area JH, if the background image for the status display area is switched to a dedicated status change background image (not shown), the text image "Status Change" is displayed. When disappears from the status display area JH, the background image for status change is switched again to the background image for status display area.

After that, in this variation, as shown in FIG. 38(E), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "6", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "7", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable production (fluctuating display) of the production symbol starts. The remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is reduced by the value 1. In other words, each time the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH decreases by the value 1 and is counted down (169 times remaining. Note that the first pending display When the hold icon 9A displayed at the position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. , and there is only one item in stock with the pending icon 9A remaining unexpired.

A player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), and there are successive losses without success, and only 114 times after the power is turned on (in other words, in FIG. 38 In (B), the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed (Only 14 rotations after the end of the variation) The variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern is started, stopped, and the loss is confirmed, and then the 1 When the pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable production (fluctuating display) of the production pattern is started as shown in FIG. 38(F). Ru. As a result, the 115th rotation is in progress after the power is turned on (in other words, the 15th rotation is in progress after the end of the variation in which the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in FIG. 38(D)). ). Accordingly, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH becomes 155, and "155 times remaining" is displayed.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only three pending icons 9A remain in stock without being consumed.

After the power is turned on, when the 115th rotation is in progress, as shown in FIG. The display is temporarily stopped at the number "7", and the middle effect pattern 8C continues to perform a variable effect (fluctuating display), and the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R have the same number pattern (here, A reach is formed at the number "7").

After that, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and furthermore, the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, all pending icons 9A, When the 1st hold display position 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and furthermore, the status display area JH is also hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a). ), the battle performance is started as shown in FIG. 38(H).

When the battle performance starts, an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a as an opponent of the ally character CRA, and a battle between the ally character CRA and the ally character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a. The enemy character CRB fights. Since the battle performance can suggest to the player that the expectation of winning is higher than when the battle performance has not started, the player has a high interest in the battle performance. When the ally character CRA wins in the battle performance, it becomes a win, and then a winning game is started in which the player is given a profit. On the other hand, if the friendly character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB is victorious in the battle performance, it will be a loss.

When the ally character CRA wins in the battle performance, as shown in FIG. It is temporarily stopped and displayed at "7"), and then it is stopped and displayed at the same timing, and the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are aligned with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), The win is confirmed. When the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a again and are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), the variation icon 9C and the variation display are further displayed. The position 9Cd, all the hold icons 9A, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed on the display screen 7a again, while the status display area JH remains hidden on the display screen 7a. (the state remains disappeared from the display screen 7a). Note that the status display area JH is also displayed on the display screen when the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, all pending icons 9A, and the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are displayed on the display screen 7a again. 7a.

In the battle performance, when the ally character CRA is defeated, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a again, and they do not line up with the same symbol (here, the number "7") and are temporarily stopped. It is displayed and then stopped and displayed at the same timing, and the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern (number "7" here), and a loss is confirmed. When the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a again and are not aligned with the same pattern (here, the number "7") and are temporarily stopped, the fluctuation icon 9C, The variable display position 9Cd, all the hold icons 9A, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed on the display screen 7a again, and the status display area JH is displayed on the display screen 7a. A player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and there are successive losses without success, and the status display area JH displays "Status 2". The remaining number of times will be displayed. In other words, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance will be displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining number of variable performances (variable display). In this fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the remaining number of times, the state of the setting suggestion presentation may change. Here, it is made clear to the player that "state 2" remains as the state of the setting suggestion performance.

When a win is determined, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and thereafter, a winning game in which a profit is awarded to the player is started. When the winning game is started, the game switches from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, and the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first grand prize opening 30. When the winning game ends, the right-handed game continues, and when the left-handed game was played, the pending icon 9A was not digested and there were only three items in stock. The pending icon 9A is cleared. Then, when the player plays a game in which a game ball enters the second starting port 21 (a so-called right-handed game), the number of unused and stocked pending icons 9B increases.

A player plays a game in which a game ball enters the second starting port 21 (a so-called right-handed game), and there are successive losses without success, and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols occurs only 24 times. When the hold icon 9B that was displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change effect of the effect symbol (fluctuating display) is started and stopped and the loss is confirmed. is started. As a result, after the end of the winning game, the 25th rotation is in progress.

When the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd moves to the third hold display position 9Bd. Then, the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd moves to the second hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B displayed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd. However, only three pending icons 9B remain in stock without being consumed.

After the end of the winning game, when the 25th spin is changing, as shown in FIG. A status display image JM3 of a setting suggestion performance that can be suggested (notified) has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The status display image JM3 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion performance status display image JM3 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion performance status display image JM1 described above and the setting suggestion performance status display image JM2 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 3 display background image (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the setting suggestion effect state display image JM3. In front of this background image for displaying state 3, a character image reading "state 3 setting high confidence" is placed. The background image for displaying state 3 has a design and contrast set and is opaque in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence".

When the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area that was displayed on the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed on the lower left corner of the display screen 7a. Then, a character image "Status Change" is displayed in the status display area JH. At this time, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned background image for the status display area is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the status display area JH. Instead, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in state will occur.

Although the status display area JH overlaps with the downstream side of the variation area of the left effect pattern 8L in the front-rear direction, the status display area JH is arranged at the frontmost side like the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, it is not obstructed by the left presentation pattern 8L and is not difficult to see. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned background image for the status display area is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the status display area JH. Instead, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in state will occur.

When the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears from 7a. At this time, the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower left corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing its size, the character image "Status Change" that was displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH. , a text image "Status 3" is displayed in the upper row of the status display area JH, and a text image "130 times remaining" is displayed in the lower row of the status display area JH, divided into upper and lower rows. In other words, in the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence", the information "Status 3" is reflected as is, but by switching from the information "Setting High Confidence" to the information "130 times remaining" , it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance will be displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 130 variable performances (variable displays). In the remaining 130 variable effects (variable displays), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is clearly shown to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is transited to "state 3" and that "state 3" is to be stayed.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3," the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect (reliability rate) are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 8 to 13.

Although the character image "Status Change" displayed in the status display area JH disappears, the background image for the status display area described above continues to be arranged in the status display area JH. Note that when the text image "Status Change" is displayed in the status display area JH, if the background image for the status display area is switched to a dedicated status change background image (not shown), the text image "Status Change" is displayed. When disappears from the status display area JH, the background image for status change is switched again to the background image for status display area.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 38(K), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "4", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "8", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd moves to the second hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B displayed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd. , and only two pending icons 9B remain in stock without being consumed. In addition, in this state, if one game ball enters the second starting port 21, the hold icon 9B will be displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B will be stocked without being consumed. The state is such that only three exist.

When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH formed at the lower left corner of the display screen 7a becomes the value 1, as shown in FIG. 38(L). The remaining number of times is displayed in the status display area JH as "129 times remaining." That is, each time a variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbol is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH is decreased by the value 1 and counted down.

After that, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned to the same numerical pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, When the right performance symbols 8R align with the symbols of the same number and are stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed, and thereafter a winning game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

When the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (playing a game called right-handed hitting), the rotation speed is constant when hitting right-handed until the next hit is confirmed. A status display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a every 25 rotations. The state display image of the setting suggestion performance here may be the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance that can suggest (notify) the player that the state is "state 1", or may be the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance that can suggest (notify) the player that the state is "state 1". In some cases, the status display image JM2 is a setting suggestion effect that can suggest (notify) the player that the current condition is ``Status 3''. It may be a state display image JM3 of a suggestion effect, or it may be a state display image of a setting suggestion effect that can suggest (notify) the player that it is in "state 4".

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the second starting port 21 a predetermined number of times (time saving number of times) (playing a game called right-handed hitting), and if there are consecutive losses without winning, the player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), and the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area displayed on the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed. When the remaining number of times that is displayed again in the lower right corner of the screen 7a and then displayed in the status display area JH becomes zero, "Zero times remaining" is displayed, the display of the state of the setting suggestion effect is finished, and the state Display area JH will disappear from display screen 7a. When the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH becomes zero and the status display area JH disappears from the display screen 7a, this is used as an opportunity to initialize the state of the setting suggestion performance to "state 1".

In the state change performance M of the setting suggestion performance, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (playing a game called right-handed hitting), the next hit is confirmed. Until now, a status display image of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a every 25 revolutions, which is a constant number of revolutions when the player is right-handed. On the other hand, when a player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), the ball rotates at a constant rate when hitting left-handed until a hit is confirmed. A status display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a every 50 rotations. In this way, the constant rotation speed of 25 rotations when hitting the ball right-handed is smaller than 50 rotations that is the constant rotation speed when hitting the ball left-handed. In other words, when a win is determined, the number of rotations at which the status display image of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a is changed using this as a trigger.

Furthermore, the game changes from a game in which the player enters a game ball into the second starting port 21 (a game called right-handed hitting) to a game in which a player enters a gaming ball into the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed hitting game). Returning again, the status display image of the setting suggestion effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a every 50 rotations, which is a constant rotation speed when hitting left-handed.

Note that in the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect, the state display images of each setting suggestion effect in FIGS. It is displayed on the display screen 7a based on this.

In addition, in the state change performance M of the setting suggestion performance, for example, in FIG. The status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a, except for the character image "Setting High Accuracy". At this time, the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing its size, the character image "Status Change" that was displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH. , a text image "Status 2" was displayed in the upper row of the status display area JH, and a text image "220 times remaining" was displayed in the lower row of the status display area JH, divided into upper and lower rows. However, when the text image "Condition 2 Setting High Accuracy" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the text, and finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image "Condition 3 Setting High Accuracy" You may jump up to "Shin". By doing this, the contents of the text image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a and the text image displayed when moving to the status display area JH will change. Therefore, when the player's line of sight moves not only to the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a, but also to the status display area JH. Since it is possible to point the player to the character image to be displayed, it is possible to arouse the player's sense of anticipation regarding the change in the state of the setting suggestion performance.

[Status change performance N of setting suggestion performance]
Next, the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 39. When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the statically displayed performance symbols move slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode, and then ( In other words, after the stop display of the performance design is released, the performance design changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from low to downward (after the performance design is in the display mode that it is about to move) The state changes and the display mode changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the performance pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production design decelerates just before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). . When the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, they move gradually and slowly in the vertical direction.

To briefly explain the fluctuating icons and hold icons, for example, as shown in FIG. 39(A), they correspond to the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which are currently changing as the expiry of the first special figure hold. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second special figure reservation is provided. A second hold display area is provided as a second hold display area. In the first hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Ad. In the second hold display area, although not shown, hold icons 9B can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be displayed. It is now possible to stock up. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that when the player is playing a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is While the 4th hold display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the 1st hold display position 9Bd to the 4th hold display position 9Bd of the hold icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the left-handed When playing a game, a hold icon 9B exists and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). Furthermore, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is played. 4. The hold display position 9Ad is not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the hold icon 9A exists when playing the right-handed game and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the hold icon 9A is completed). Then, the first to fourth pending display positions 9Bd to 9Bd of the pending icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

After turning on the power of the gaming machine 1, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and there are no hits and losses in a row, and the production pattern is displayed only 24 times. The fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started and stopped, and the loss is confirmed.After that, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, as shown in the figure. As shown in 39(A), a fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started. As a result, after the power is turned on, the 25th revolution is being varied. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed.

After the power is turned on, when the 25th rotation is changing, the status display of the setting suggestion effect is started as shown in FIG. ” is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. . The status display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 1 Setting Normal" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance is arranged on the near side of the variation area of the left production pattern 8L, the variation area of the middle production pattern 8C, and the variation area of the right production pattern 8R. As a result, although the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect overlaps with a part of the area on the right side of the fluctuation area of the left effect pattern 8L in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is the left effect. It is not obstructed by the symbol 8L and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is in a state where it straddles the fluctuation area of the medium effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction. Although it overlaps with the fluctuation area in the front and back direction, the setting suggestion effect status display image JM1 is not obstructed by the middle effect pattern 8C and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape of the setting suggestion effect status display image JM1 is similar to the right effect. Although it overlaps with a part of the left side of the variation area of the symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance is not obstructed by the right performance symbol 8R and is not difficult to see.

A state 1 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 1 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, and "state 1 settings" is placed in front of this state 1 display background image. An image of the text "Normal" is placed. The background image for displaying state 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1 setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a that corresponds to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 1 display background image. Note that the background image for displaying state 1 may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal." In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

When the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears), and the status display area JH is displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. When the character image "Normal" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the status display area JH, the text image "Normal" appears in the upper row of the status display area JH. In the lower row of the character image and status display area JH, a character image "220 times remaining" is displayed in upper and lower rows, respectively. In other words, in the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal", the information "Status 1" is reflected as is, but by switching from the information "Setting Normal" to the information "220 times remaining", the setting It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the suggestive performance will be displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 220 variable performances (variable displays). In the remaining 220 variable effects (variable displays), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, first, "state 1" is set as the state of the setting suggestion performance, and it is made clear to the player that "state 1" will remain.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

Although the status display area JH overlaps with the downstream side of the variation area of the right effect pattern 8R in the front-rear direction, the status display area JH is arranged at the frontmost side like the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, it is not obstructed by the right presentation pattern 8R and is not difficult to see. Further, a dedicated status display area background image (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the status display area JH. The background image for the status display area is opaque with a design and contrast set to improve the visibility of the text image "Status 1" and the text image "220 times left". . This makes it difficult to see the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH through the status display area background image. The background image for the status display area may be opaque to semi-transparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the text image "Status 1" and the text image "220 times left". It can also be used as a thing. In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH can be visually recognized through the status display area background image.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 39(C), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "2", and when the symbols with the same number do not line up, it is then stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable production (fluctuating display) of the production symbol starts. The remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is reduced by the value 1. In other words, each time the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH is decreased by the value 1 and counted down (219 times remaining). Note that when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, there are no pending icons 9A that are not digested and are stocked. It becomes a state where it does not.

A player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), and there are successive losses without success, and only 39 times after the power is turned on (in other words, in Figure 39 In (B), the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed (only 14 rotations after the end of the variation) The variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern is started, stopped, and the loss is confirmed, and then the When the pending icon 9A displayed at the 1 pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol is started. As a result, the 40th rotation is in progress after the power is turned on (in other words, the 15th rotation is in progress after the end of the variation in which the setting suggestion effect status display image JM1 is displayed in FIG. 39(B)). ). Accordingly, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH becomes 205, and "205 times remaining" is displayed.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and there are only two hold icons 9A that are not digested and are stocked. .

After the power is turned on, during the 40th revolution, as shown in FIG. A status display image JM2 of a setting suggestion performance that can be performed (notification) is displayed (appears) in a horizontally long rectangular shape on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM2 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect has the same configuration as the state display image JM1 of the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 2 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 2 is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. On the front side of this background image for displaying state 2, a text image that reads "state 2 setting high accuracy" is arranged. The background image for displaying state 2 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy".

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image "Status Change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned background image for the status display area is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the status display area JH. Instead, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in state will occur.

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen, except for the character image "Condition 2 Setting High Accuracy". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears from 7a. At this time, the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing its size, the character image "Status Change" that was displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH. , a text image "Status 2" is displayed in the upper row of the status display area JH, and a text image "205 times remaining" is displayed in the lower row of the status display area JH, divided into upper and lower rows. In other words, in the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy", the information "Status 2" is reflected as is, but by switching from the information "Setting High Accuracy" to the information "Remaining 205 times", , it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance will be displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 205 variable performances (variable displays). In the remaining 205 variable presentations (variable displays), the state of the setting suggestion presentation may change. Here, it is clearly shown to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is transited to "state 2" and that "state 2" is to be stayed.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect (reliability rate) are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

Although the character image "Status Change" displayed in the status display area JH disappears, the background image for the status display area described above continues to be arranged in the status display area JH. Note that when the text image "Status Change" is displayed in the status display area JH, if the background image for the status display area is switched to a dedicated status change background image (not shown), the text image "Status Change" is displayed. When disappears from the status display area JH, the background image for status change is switched again to the background image for status display area.

After that, in this variation, as shown in FIG. 39(E), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "6", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "7", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable production (fluctuating display) of the production symbol starts. The remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is reduced by the value 1. In other words, each time the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH is decreased by a value of 1 and counted down (204 times remaining). Note that when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad accordingly moves. The icon moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and a state is reached in which only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed.

A player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), and there are successive losses without success, and only 69 times after the power is turned on (in other words, in Figure 39 In (D), the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed (only 29 rotations after the end of the variation) The variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern is started, stopped, and the loss is confirmed, and then the When the pending icon 9A displayed at the 1 pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. As a result, after the power is turned on, the fluctuation is occurring at the 70th revolution (in other words, the fluctuation is occurring at the 30th revolution after the end of the fluctuation in which the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in FIG. 39(D)). ). Accordingly, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH becomes 175, and "175 times remaining" is displayed.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only three pending icons 9A remain in stock without being consumed.

After the power is turned on, when the 70th revolution is in progress, as shown in FIG. The status display image JM1 of the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect that can be displayed (notification) is again displayed (appears) in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a.

When the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image "Status Change". At this time, in this embodiment, the above-described background image for the status display area is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the status display area JH. Instead, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in state will occur.

When the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves toward the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves while reducing the size of the character, and finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image "Status Change" that was displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH. A text image "Status 1" is displayed in the upper row of the status display area JH, and a text image "175 times remaining" is displayed in the lower row of the status display area JH, divided into upper and lower rows. In other words, in the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal", the information "Status 1" is reflected as is, but by switching from the information "Setting Normal" to the information "175 times remaining", the setting It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the suggestive performance will be displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 175 variable performances (variable displays). In the remaining 175 variable effects (variable displays), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is made clear to the player that "state 1" will continue to be the state of the setting suggestion performance.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

Although the character image "Status Change" displayed in the status display area JH disappears, the background image for the status display area described above continues to be arranged in the status display area JH. Note that when the text image "Status Change" is displayed in the status display area JH, if the background image for the status display area is switched to a dedicated status change background image (not shown), the text image "Status Change" is displayed. When disappears from the status display area JH, the background image for status change is switched again to the background image for status display area.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 39(G), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "4", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then the number is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable production (fluctuating display) of the production symbol starts. Then, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a decreases by the value 1. In other words, each time the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH is decreased by a value of 1 and counted down (174 times remaining). Note that when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad accordingly moves. Moved to the second hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moved to the first hold display position 9Ad, and two hold icons 9A were stocked without being digested. It becomes a state where only one person exists.

A player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), and there are no hits and no losses, and only 84 times after the power is turned on (in other words, FIG. 39 In (F), the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed (only 14 rotations after the end of the variation) The variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern is started and stopped, the loss is confirmed, and then the When the pending icon 9A displayed at the 1 pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol is started. As a result, the 85th rotation is in progress after the power is turned on (in other words, the 15th rotation is in progress after the end of the variation in which the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in FIG. 39(F)). ). Accordingly, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH becomes 160, and "160 times remaining" is displayed.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed.

After the power is turned on, when the 85th revolution is in progress, as shown in FIG. The status display image JM2 of the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect that can be displayed (notification) is again displayed (appears) in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a.

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image "Status Change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned background image for the status display area is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the status display area JH. Instead, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in state will occur.

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen, except for the character image "Condition 2 Setting High Accuracy". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears from 7a. At this time, the character image "Status 1 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing its size, the character image "Status Change" that was displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH. , a text image "Status 2" is displayed in the upper row of the status display area JH, and a text image "160 times remaining" is displayed in the lower row of the status display area JH, divided into upper and lower rows. In other words, in the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy", the information "Status 2" is reflected as is, but by switching from the information "Setting High Accuracy" to the information "Remaining 160 times", , it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance will be displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 160 variable performances (variable displays). In the remaining 160 variable effects (variable displays), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is clearly shown to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is transited to "state 2" and that "state 2" is to be stayed.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2," the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect (reliability rate) are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

Although the character image "Status Change" displayed in the status display area JH disappears, the background image for the status display area described above continues to be arranged in the status display area JH. Note that when the text image "Status Change" is displayed in the status display area JH, if the background image for the status display area is switched to a dedicated status change background image (not shown), the text image "Status Change" is displayed. When disappears from the status display area JH, the background image for status change is switched again to the background image for status display area.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 39(I), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "7", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "0", and when the symbols with the same number do not line up, it is then stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol starts. The remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is reduced by the value 1. That is, each time the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH is decreased by the value 1 and counted down (159 times remaining). Note that when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, there are no pending icons 9A that have been stocked without being digested. It becomes a state where it does not.

A player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), and there are no hits and no losses, and only 124 times after the power is turned on (in other words, FIG. 39 In (H), the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed (Only 39 rotations after the end of the variation) The variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern is started, stopped, and the loss is confirmed, and then the When the pending icon 9A displayed at the 1 pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. As a result, after the power is turned on, the fluctuation is occurring at the 125th rotation (in other words, the fluctuation is occurring at the 40th rotation after the end of the fluctuation in which the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in FIG. 39(H)). ). Accordingly, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH becomes 120, and "120 times remaining" is displayed.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and there are only two hold icons 9A that are not digested and are stocked. .

After the power is turned on, when the 125th revolution is in progress, as shown in FIG. A status display image JM3 of a setting suggestion performance that can be performed (notification) is displayed (appears) in a horizontally long rectangular shape on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The status display image JM3 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion performance status display image JM3 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion performance status display image JM1 described above and the setting suggestion performance status display image JM2 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 3 display background image (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of this background image for displaying state 3, a character image reading "state 3 setting high confidence" is arranged. The background image for displaying state 3 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 3 setting high confidence".

When the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image "Status Change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned background image for the status display area is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the status display area JH. Instead, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in state will occur.

When the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears from 7a. At this time, the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing its size, the character image "Status Change" that was displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH. , a text image "Status 3" is displayed in the upper row of the status display area JH, and a text image "120 times remaining" is displayed in the lower row of the status display area JH, divided into upper and lower rows. In other words, in the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence", the information "Status 3" is reflected as is, but by switching from the information "Setting High Confidence" to the information "120 times remaining" , it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance will be displayed on the display screen 7a in the remaining 120 variable performances (variable displays). In the remaining 120 variable effects (variable displays), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is clearly shown to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is transited to "state 3" and that "state 3" is to be stayed.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3," the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 8 to 13.

Although the character image "Status Change" displayed in the status display area JH disappears, the background image for the status display area described above continues to be arranged in the status display area JH. Note that when the text image "Status Change" is displayed in the status display area JH, if the background image for the status display area is switched to a dedicated status change background image (not shown), the text image "Status Change" is displayed. When disappears from the status display area JH, the background image for status change is switched again to the background image for status display area.

After that, in this variation, as shown in FIG. 39(K), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "4", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "8", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable production (fluctuating display) of the production symbol starts. The remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is reduced by the value 1. In other words, each time the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH is decreased by a value of 1 and counted down (119 times remaining). Note that when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad accordingly moves. The icon moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and a state is reached in which only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. As a result, the 126th rotation is in progress after the power is turned on (in other words, the 1st rotation is in progress after the end of the variation in which the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in FIG. 39 (J)). ). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 39(L), the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH becomes 119, and "119 times remaining" is displayed.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed.

After the power is turned on, the 126th rotation is in progress, and if the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R are not aligned to the same number and are stopped and displayed, the loss will be confirmed. When the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R are aligned and stopped and displayed as the same number symbols, a win is confirmed, and a winning game in which a profit is given to the player starts. It will be done.

After that, if the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting) and there are consecutive losses without winning, the remaining number of times will be displayed in the status display area JH. When becomes zero, "zero times remaining" is displayed, the display of the state of the setting suggestion effect is ended, and the state display area JH disappears from the display screen 7a. When the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH becomes zero and the status display area JH disappears from the display screen 7a, this is used as an opportunity to initialize the state of the setting suggestion performance to "state 1".

In the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (when playing a game called left-handed hitting), the state of the setting suggestion performance is displayed. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the number of rotations at which the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbol is started and stopped and displayed (the number of consecutive losses confirmed). This number of rotations may increase or decrease, so it is random and determined by a lottery of the sub-control board 90.

In the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect, the state display images of each setting suggestion effect in FIGS. 39(B), (D), (F), (H), and (J) are the states shown in FIG. It is displayed on the display screen 7a based on what has been determined in the transition process.

In addition, in the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (when playing a game called left-handed hitting), the setting suggestion performance is Although the number of rotations at which the status display image is displayed on the display screen 7a is random, for example, the number of rotations may be increased each time the state of the setting suggestion effect steps up or jumps up. In this way, the number of rotations itself can be provided to the player as a suggestion of the setting information. Further, the player who sees the remaining number of times displayed in the state display area JH, which is the number of rotations, can contribute to discovering for himself the law between the state of the setting suggestion performance and the number of rotations.

In addition, in the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance, for example, in FIG. The status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a, except for the character image "Setting High Accuracy". At this time, the character image "Status 1 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing its size, the character image "Status Change" that was displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH. , a text image reading "Status 2" was displayed in the upper row of the status display area JH, and a text image reading "160 times remaining" was displayed in the lower row of the status display area JH, divided into upper and lower rows. However, when the text image "Condition 2 Setting High Accuracy" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the text, and finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image "Condition 3 Setting High Accuracy" You may jump up to "Shin". By doing this, the contents of the text image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a and the text image displayed when moving to the status display area JH will change. Therefore, when the player's line of sight moves not only to the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a, but also to the status display area JH. Since it is possible to point the player to the character image to be displayed, it is possible to arouse the player's sense of anticipation regarding the change in the state of the setting suggestion performance.

[Status change performance of setting suggestion performance O]
Next, the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 40. When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the statically displayed performance symbols move slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode, and then ( In other words, after the stop display of the production design is released, the production design changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from low to downward (after the performance design is in the display mode that it is about to move) The state changes and the display mode changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the performance pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production design decelerates just before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). . When the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, they move gradually and slowly in the vertical direction.

To briefly explain the fluctuation icon and the hold icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 40(A), they correspond to the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which are currently changing as the first special figure pending is extinguished. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second special figure reservation is provided. A second hold display area is provided as a second hold display area. In the first hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Ad. In the second hold display area, although not shown, hold icons 9B can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be displayed. It is now possible to stock up. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

To briefly explain the pending icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. ing. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, purple spherical icon, empty box icon, red spherical icon, green spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, yellow The (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the treasure chest icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the highest probability of winning. The 4th highest expectation of winning is the green spherical icon, the 5th highest expectation of winning is the green spherical icon, the 6th highest expectation of winning is the blue spherical icon, and the lowest expectation of winning is the white spherical icon. It has become a thing.

Note that the treasure box icon usually has a closed lid, and may change from a closed state to an open state. When the treasure box icon changes from a closed state to an open state, the probability of winning the treasure box icon becomes higher and the lid remains open. Also, when the treasure chest icon changes from the closed state to the open state, the state of the setting suggestion may change or remain the same, and the icon may change to another icon or return to the original icon. do.

Further, the background image (referred to as a "special background image") used in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect is a special image that is not included in the normal background image in addition to the normal background image. Examples of normal background images include normal images such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, an ocean floor image, and an underground image. The special background images include special images such as space images, spacecraft interior images, base images, and game hall images. The normal background image and the special background image may be still images or moving images.

When the player is playing a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold of the hold icon 9A is played. While the display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd of the hold icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the left-handed game is not displayed). While the processing is in progress, a pending icon 9B is present and displayed on the display screen 7a until the processing is completed). In addition, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is played. 4. The hold display position 9Ad is hidden on the display screen 7a (of course, when playing the game of right-hand hitting, the hold icon 9A exists and is displayed on the display screen 7a until it is completed). Then, the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd of the hold icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When the fluctuation icon 9C is reached, as shown in FIG. 40(A), the city image HG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) of the effect pattern is started. . Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. , and there are only two pending icons 9A in stock without being consumed. The fluctuation icon 9C and the two pending icons 9A are white spherical icons.

After that, during the change, as shown in FIG. 40(B), the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad changes from the white spherical hold icon 9A to the treasure chest hold icon 9A. Change. At this time, the lid of the treasure chest hold icon 9A is in a closed state.

Thereafter, during the change, as shown in FIG. 40(C), the lid of the treasure chest hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad changes from the closed state to the open state. Taking this as an opportunity, the status display of the setting suggestion performance is started, and the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance that can suggest (notify) the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 1" is displayed. It has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The status display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 1 Setting Normal" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance is arranged in front of the variable area of the left performance pattern 8L, the fluctuation area of the middle performance pattern 8C, and the fluctuation area of the right performance pattern 8R. As a result, although the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect overlaps with a part of the area on the right side of the fluctuation area of the left effect pattern 8L in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is the left effect. It is not obstructed by the symbol 8L and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is in a state where it straddles the fluctuation area of the middle effect symbol 8C in the left and right direction. Although it overlaps with the fluctuation area in the front and back direction, the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is not obstructed by the middle effect pattern 8C and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape of the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is similar to that of the right effect. Although it overlaps with a part of the left side of the variation area of the symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance is not obstructed by the right performance symbol 8R and is not difficult to see. Note that the city image HG1 continues to be displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a.

A state 1 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 1 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, and "state 1 settings" is placed in front of this state 1 display background image. An image of the text "Normal" is placed. The background image for displaying state 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1 setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a that corresponds to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 1 display background image. Note that the background image for displaying state 1 may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal." In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

When the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears), and the status display area JH, which is displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a, is displayed. When the text image "Normal" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the text, and finally moves to the status display area JH, the text image "Status 1" in the status display area JH appears. , text images "80 times remaining" are displayed in upper and lower rows in the lower row of the status display area JH. In other words, in the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal", the information "Status 1" is reflected as is, but by switching from the information "Setting Normal" to the information "80 times remaining", the current The state of the setting suggestion effect may change during the remaining 80 fluctuating effects (fluctuating displays) from the start to the end of the state display of the setting suggestion effect. It is now possible to clearly indicate to the player that the player will be staying.

In addition, when the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the treasure chest whose lid is open displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is held. The icon 9A returns to the white spherical hold icon 9A (changes to hold).

During this period of the remaining 80 fluctuating performances (fluctuating displays), the state of the setting suggestion rendering may change, and the frequency of the setting suggestion rendering associated with the status of the setting suggestion rendering, here "state 1" ( The setting suggestion performance is performed based on the occurrence rate) and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

Although the status display area JH overlaps with the downstream side of the variation area of the right effect pattern 8R in the front-rear direction, the status display area JH is arranged at the frontmost side like the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, it is not obstructed by the right presentation pattern 8R and is not difficult to see. Further, a dedicated status display area background image (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the status display area JH. The background image for the status display area is opaque with a design and contrast set to improve the visibility of the text image "Status 1" and the text image "80 times left". . This makes it difficult to see the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH through the status display area background image. The background image for the status display area may be opaque to semi-transparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the text image "Status 1" and the text image "80 times left". It can also be used as a thing. In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH can be visually recognized through the status display area background image.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 40(D), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "2", and when the symbols with the same number do not line up, it is then stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol starts. The remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is reduced by the value 1. That is, each time a variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbol is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH is decreased by the value 1 and counted down. Note that when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad accordingly moves. The icon moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and a state is reached in which only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed.

A player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and there are successive losses without success, and the status display of the setting suggestion performance starts only 44 times. (In other words, only 44 rotations after the end of the variation in which the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect was displayed in FIG. 40(C)) The variation effect (fluctuation display) of the effect symbol is started, stopped, and the loss is confirmed. Then, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. As a result, after the start of the state display of the setting suggestion effect, the 45th rotation is in progress (that is, the 45th rotation after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect was displayed in FIG. (The eyes are still changing). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 40(E), the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH becomes 35, and "35 times remaining" is displayed.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only three pending icons 9A remain in stock without being consumed. Note that the city image HG1 continues to be displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a.

After the status display of the setting suggestion performance starts, when the 45th revolution is changing, as shown in FIG. The icon 9A changes from a white spherical pending icon 9A to a treasure chest pending icon 9A. At this time, the lid of the treasure chest hold icon 9A is in a closed state. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, during the change, as shown in FIG. 40(G), the lid of the treasure chest hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad changes from the closed state to the open state. Taking this as an opportunity, the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect that can suggest (notify) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2" is displayed on the display screen with a horizontally elongated rectangular shape. It is displayed (appears) on the horizontal line passing through the center of 7a. The state display image JM2 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect has the same configuration as the state display image JM1 of the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 2 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 2 is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of this background image for displaying state 2, a character image reading "state 2 setting high accuracy" is arranged. The background image for state 2 display has a design and contrast set and is opaque in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy".

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image "Status Change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned background image for the status display area is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the status display area JH. Instead, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in state will occur.

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen, except for the character image "Condition 2 Setting High Accuracy". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears from 7a. At this time, the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing its size, the character image "Status Change" that was displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH. , a text image "Status 2" is displayed in the upper row of the status display area JH, and a text image "35 times remaining" is displayed in the lower row of the status display area JH, divided into upper and lower rows. In other words, in the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy", the information "Status 2" is reflected as is, but by switching from the information "Setting High Accuracy" to the information "Remaining 35 times", , is currently in "state 2", and the state of the setting suggestion presentation may change in the remaining 35 fluctuating presentations (fluctuating displays) from the start to the end of the setting suggestion presentation, and the setting suggestion presentation may change. It is now possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state will remain.

In addition, when the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the treasure chest whose lid is open and which is displayed at the third holding display position 9Ad is placed on hold. The icon 9A returns to the white spherical hold icon 9A (changes to hold).

During this period of the remaining 35 fluctuating performances (fluctuating displays), the state of the setting suggestion performance may change, and the frequency of the setting suggestion performance associated with the state of the setting suggestion performance, here "state 2" ( The setting suggestion performance is performed based on the occurrence rate) and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

Although the character image "Status Change" displayed in the status display area JH disappears, the background image for the status display area described above continues to be arranged in the status display area JH. Note that when the text image "Status Change" is displayed in the status display area JH, if the background image for the status display area is switched to a dedicated status change background image (not shown), the text image "Status Change" is displayed. When disappears from the status display area JH, the background image for status change is switched again to the background image for status display area.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 40(H), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "6", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "7", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol starts. The remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is reduced by the value 1. That is, each time a variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbol is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH is decreased by the value 1 and counted down. Note that when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad changes accordingly. Moved to the second hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moved to the first hold display position 9Ad, and two hold icons 9A were stocked without being digested. It becomes a state where only one person exists.

A player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and there are successive losses without success, and the status display of the setting suggestion performance starts only 64 times. (In other words, only 64 rotations after the end of the variation in which the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect was displayed in FIG. 40(C)) The variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started, stopped, and the loss is confirmed. Then, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. As a result, after the start of the state display of the setting suggestion effect, the 65th rotation is in progress (that is, the 65th rotation after the end of the variation in which the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect was displayed in FIG. (The eyes are still changing). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 40(I), the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH becomes 15, and "15 times remaining" is displayed.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed. Note that the city image HG1 continues to be displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a.

After the state display of the setting suggestion effect is started, when the 65th revolution is in progress, the message image MS1 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a during the change. (Appear). This message image MS1 is a background image change preview effect, is an image that announces a background image change notice, includes a text image that says "The background image may change!", and is placed at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. ing. In other words, the message image MS1 is placed in front of the variable area of the left presentation pattern 8L, the medium presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R. As a result, although the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the message image MS1 overlaps a part of the area on the right side of the fluctuation area of the left effect pattern 8L in the front-rear direction, the message image MS1 is not obstructed by the left effect pattern 8L and does not become difficult to see. Furthermore, although the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the message image MS1 straddles the variable area of the medium effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction and overlaps the variable area of the medium effect pattern 8C in the front and back direction, the message image MS1 is in the medium effect. It is not obstructed by the symbol 8C and is not difficult to see, and although the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the message image MS1 overlaps a part of the left side of the fluctuation area of the right production symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the message image MS1 is not obstructed by the right production symbol 8R. It will not be obstructed by the weather and will not be difficult to see. Note that, even at this point, the city image HG1 continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image.

A background image for a message image (not shown) is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the message image MS1, and a text image saying "The background image may change!" is arranged in front of this background image for the message image. ing. The background image for the message image is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the text image "The background image may change!". As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the message image MS1 is difficult to see through the message image background image. Note that the background image for the message image may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "Background image may change!". In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the message image MS1 can be visually recognized through the message image background image. Note that when the message image MS1, which is a text image saying "The background image may change!", is displayed on the display screen 7a, a voice saying "The background image may change", which is the content of this text image, is output from the speaker 67. It's flowing. Thereby, changes in the background image can also be announced through audio.

When the message image MS1 is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the message image MS1 disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 40(J). Then, the display screen 7a is switched from the normal background image to the spacecraft interior image HG2 as a special background image. Taking this as an opportunity, the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect that can suggest (notify) the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3" is displayed on the display screen with a horizontally elongated rectangular shape. It is displayed (appears) on the horizontal line passing through the center of 7a. The status display image JM3 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion performance status display image JM3 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion performance status display image JM1 described above and the setting suggestion performance status display image JM2 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 3 display background image (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the setting suggestion effect state display image JM3. In front of this background image for displaying state 3, a character image reading "state 3 setting high confidence" is placed. The background image for displaying state 3 has a design and contrast set and is opaque in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence".

When the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image "Status Change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned background image for the status display area is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the status display area JH. Instead, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in state will occur.

When the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears from 7a. At this time, the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing its size, the character image "Status Change" that was displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH. , a text image "Status 3" is displayed in the upper row of the status display area JH, and a text image "15 times remaining" is displayed in the lower row of the status display area JH, divided into upper and lower rows. In other words, in the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence", the information "Status 3" is reflected as is, but by switching from the information "Setting High Confidence" to the information "15 times remaining" , is currently in "state 3", and in the remaining 15 fluctuating performances (fluctuating displays) from the start to the end of the status display of the setting suggestion performance, the state of the setting suggestion performance may change, and the setting suggestion performance may change. It is now possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state will remain.

During this period of remaining 15 fluctuating effects (fluctuating displays), the state of the setting suggestion effect may change, and the frequency of the setting suggestion effect associated with the state of the setting suggestion effect, here "state 3" ( The setting suggestion performance is performed based on the occurrence rate) and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 8 to 13.

Although the character image "Status Change" displayed in the status display area JH disappears, the background image for the status display area described above continues to be arranged in the status display area JH. Note that when the text image "Status Change" is displayed in the status display area JH, if the background image for the status display area is switched to a dedicated status change background image (not shown), the text image "Status Change" is displayed. When disappears from the status display area JH, the background image for status change is switched again to the background image for status display area.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 40(K), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "4", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "8", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable production (fluctuating display) of the production symbol starts. The remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is reduced by the value 1. In other words, each time the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started, the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH is decreased by the value 1 and counted down. Note that when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, there are no pending icons 9A that are not digested and are stocked. It will be in a state where it does not.

A player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and there are successive losses without success, and the status display of the setting suggestion performance starts only 79 times. (In other words, only 79 rotations after the end of the variation in which the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect was displayed in FIG. 40(C)) The variation effect (fluctuation display) of the effect symbol is started, stopped, and the loss is confirmed. Then, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. As a result, after the start of the status display of the setting suggestion effect, the 80th rotation is in progress (that is, the 80th rotation after the end of the variation in which the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect was displayed in FIG. 40(C)). (The eyes are still changing). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 40(L), the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH becomes zero, and "0 times remaining" is displayed. Note that, even at this point, the spacecraft interior image HG2 continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a as a special background image.

Further, when the 80th rotation is in progress after the state display of the setting suggestion effect is started, the message image MS2 is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. be made (appear). This message image MS2 includes a character image "Status display ends" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. Message image MS2 has the same configuration as message image MS1 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that the above-mentioned background image for a message image (not shown) is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the message image MS2. Further, when the message image MS2, which is a text image saying "Status display ends", is displayed on the display screen 7a, a voice saying "Status display ends", which is the content of this text image, is heard from the speaker 67. It looks like this. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the status display has ended, even through audio.

When the message image MS2 is displayed for a predetermined period (3 seconds in this embodiment), the message image MS2 and the status display area JH disappear from the display screen 7a, and the city image HG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a. will be displayed again.

When the remaining number of times displayed in the status display area JH becomes zero and the status display area JH disappears from the display screen 7a, this is used as an opportunity to initialize the state of the setting suggestion performance to "state 1".

After that, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned to the same numerical pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, When the right performance symbols 8R are aligned with the symbols of the same number and are stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed, and thereafter a winning game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

In the state change production O of the setting suggestion production, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (when playing a game called left-handed hitting), the player changes to the hold icon of the treasure box. When the hold change occurs and the lid of the hold icon 9A of the treasure chest changes from the closed state to the open state, this triggers the display of the status of the setting suggestion performance to start, and the status display image of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is supposed to be done. This pending change is determined by lottery of the sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control). Thereby, it is possible to impart randomness to the timing at which the status display of the setting suggestion performance is started and the timing at which the status display image of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that the treasure box icon may not only be changed to a pending status with respect to the pending icon 9A, but also may be changed with respect to a variable icon 9C.

In addition, in the state change production O of the setting suggestion production, when the message image MS1, which is a background image change notice production and is an image announcing the background image change notice, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the message image MS1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image being displayed is switched from the normal background image to the special background image, and a status display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. This switching of the background image is determined by a lottery on the sub-control board 90 (production control microcomputer 91). As a result, by imparting randomness to the timing at which the background image displayed on the display screen 7a switches from the normal background image to the special background image, the timing at which the status display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a can be adjusted. It can have randomness.

In addition, in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect, the state display image and message image of each setting suggestion effect in FIGS. 40(C), (G), (I) to (J) are the state transition shown in FIG. It is displayed on the display screen 7a based on what has been determined in the process.

In addition, in the state change performance O of the setting suggestion performance, for example, in FIG. The status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a, except for the character image ``Setting High Trust''. At this time, the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing its size, the character image "Status Change" that was displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH. , a text image "Status 3" was displayed in the upper row of the status display area JH, and a text image "15 times remaining" was displayed in the lower row of the status display area JH, divided into upper and lower rows. However, when the text image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the text, and finally moves to the status display area JH, the text image "Status 4 Setting High It may be possible to jump up to "confidence". By doing this, the contents of the text image "Status 3 Settings High Confidence" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a and the text image displayed when moving to the status display area JH will change. Therefore, when the player's line of sight is moved not only to the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a, but also to the status display area JH, Since it is possible to point the player to the character image to be displayed, it is possible to arouse the player's sense of anticipation regarding the change in the state of the setting suggestion performance.

[Effect example]
Below, examples of effects of the state change effects M to O of the setting suggestion effects are shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change performance M of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. 38, the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. 39, and the state change performance O of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. At the time of lottery ("winning" or "losing" lottery) associated with balls (entering the game ball into the first starting port 20), setting information is referred to and a lottery is performed with a lottery probability according to the setting information. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance (the setting suggestion performance determination process in FIG. 24) that makes suggestions based on setting information, and has a plurality of setting suggestion performance states in which the settings related to the setting suggestion performance are different from each other. It is designed to be executed based on one of the setting suggestion presentation states. It is possible to execute a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) for transitioning from a first state of the setting suggestion performance states to a second state where the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player compared to the first state. It is now possible to do so. By executing this transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23), for example, in the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect in FIG. , In the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect in FIG. 39(D), there is a transition from "state 1 setting normal" to "state 2 setting high certainty", and in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect in FIG. 40(J) , there is a transition from "state 1 setting normal" to "state 3 setting high confidence". According to this configuration, it is possible to execute a transition process of transitioning from the first state of the setting suggestion presentation states to the second state in which the setting suggestion presentation can be an advantageous presentation for the player compared to the first state. Because of this, in addition to notifying players of the winning and losing results of the lottery, such as "winning" and "losing," it is also a new game in which players play games and aim to transition from the first state to the second state. It is possible to provide the player with the following features: Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change production M of the setting suggestion production shown in FIGS. When a specific number of times, 100 times, is reached, a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed. According to this configuration, the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed at specific times such as 50 and 100 times (in other words, every 50 times). Control can be performed to change the state of the setting suggestion performance based on the number of times the symbol is fluctuated (variable display) (the number of times the lottery is drawn).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. When a specific number of times is reached, a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed, and after the change is stopped and displayed, a specific number of times of 15 is executed in the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect in FIG. 39(D). When the change is reached, the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed, and after the change is stopped and displayed, a specific number of times of 30 is reached in the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect in FIG. 39(F). Then, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed, and after the change is stopped and displayed, in the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect in FIG. 39(H), when the specific number of times of 15 is reached, After the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed and the change is stopped and displayed, in the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect in FIG. (The state transition process in Figure 23) can be executed, and the transition process (the state transition process in Figure 23) can be executed by changing the specific number of times to a random number. There is. According to this configuration, since the transition process can be executed by changing the specific number of times (state transition process in FIG. 23) to a random number of times, the number of times of fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol Control can be performed to change the state of the setting suggestion performance based on (the number of times the lottery has been drawn).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change performance M of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. ) is completed, it is possible to execute transition processing by changing a specific number of times. Before hitting a hit, that is, in a state where there are successive losses without hitting, in the state change performance M of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. When the number of draws) reached a specific number of times, such as 50 or 100 times (in other words, every 50 times), it was possible to execute the transition process (the state transition process in Figure 23). When the game ends, in the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 23 state transition processing) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) by changing the specific number of times to a random number after winning (that is, after the winning game ends). Therefore, it is possible to perform control to change the state of the setting suggestion performance based on the number of fluctuating performances (fluctuating displays) of the performance symbols (number of times of lottery).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. When the icon changes from a closed state to an open state (when the display mode of a specific icon changes), a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed. In the state change performance O of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. 40(C), when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (when playing a game called left-handed hitting), When the hold status changes to the hold icon of the treasure chest and the lid of the hold icon 9A of the treasure chest changes from the closed state to the open state, this is used as a trigger to execute the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) and perform the setting suggestion effect. A status display image is displayed on the display screen 7a. This pending change is determined by lottery on the sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91). This allows randomness to be given to the timing at which the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) is started. According to this configuration, by lottery of the sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91), the pending icon 9A becomes the treasure chest pending icon 9A (specific icon), and the lid of the treasure box pending icon 9A is changed from the closed state. Since the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed when the state changes to the open state (when the display mode of a specific icon changes), the sub control board 90 (performance control The state of the setting suggestion performance can be controlled by lottery (in other words, distribution by lottery) of the microcomputer 91).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. A background image change notice effect is performed to switch to the spacecraft interior image HG2 (second background image), which is a special background image different from the first background image), and a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed with the transition of the background image. is now possible. When the message image MS1, which is a background image change notice effect and is an image that announces a background image change notice, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the background image displayed on the display screen 7a is changed to the normal background image (the first (background image) to a special background image (second background image), a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed, and a status display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. . This switching of the background image is determined by a lottery of the sub-control board 90 (the production control microcomputer 91). This allows randomness to be given to the timing at which the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) is started. According to this configuration, a special background image different from the city image HG1 (first background image) is selected from the city image HG1 (first background image), which is a normal background image, by lottery of the sub-control board 90 (the production control microcomputer 91). A background image change notice effect is performed to switch to the spacecraft interior image HG2 (second background image), and the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed with the transition of the background image. Control to change the state of the setting suggestion performance can be performed by lottery (in other words, distribution by lottery) of the sub control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change performance M of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. 38 and the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. 39, the display of the current setting suggestion performance state is ended when the termination condition is met. do. In the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the variable performance (variable display) of the game will be displayed on the display screen 7a. Until the end condition of the remaining 220 fluctuating performances (variable displays) is satisfied, the state of the setting suggestion rendering may change. In the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the variable performance (variable display) of the game will be displayed on the display screen 7a. Until the end condition of the remaining 220 fluctuating performances (variable displays) is satisfied, the state of the setting suggestion rendering may change. According to this configuration, the state of the setting suggestion effect, which is one state that is transitioned by the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23), changes (transitions) over a limited period until the end condition is satisfied. When the termination condition is met, the display of the current setting suggestion performance state can be terminated.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change performance M of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. 38 and the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. ) reaches a certain number of times, ie, 220 times, the display of the current setting suggestion performance state (display of the current setting suggestion performance state) is terminated. In other words, it is possible to display one state that has been transitioned to by the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) until the predetermined number of times reaches 220 times. In the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the variable performance (variable display) of the game will be displayed on the display screen 7a. Until the end condition of the remaining 220 fluctuating performances (variable displays) is satisfied, the state of the setting suggestion rendering may change. In the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the variable performance (variable display) of the game will be displayed on the display screen 7a. Until the end condition of the remaining 220 fluctuating performances (variable displays) is satisfied, the state of the setting suggestion rendering may change. According to this configuration, when the number of fluctuating performances (fluctuating displays) of the performance symbols (the number of lottery draws) reaches a certain number of times, 220, the state of the current setting suggestion rendering is displayed (the state of the current setting suggestion rendering). Display) can be terminated, and one state (current setting suggestion presentation state (current setting suggestion presentation state )), it is possible to clearly show the stay in the state to the player by displaying the number of times the game ends.

[Modified example]
Below, modified examples of state change effects M to O of the setting suggestion effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 40(I) and 40(J), the city image HG1 (first A background image change notice effect is performed to switch to the spacecraft interior image HG2 (second background image), which is a special background image different from the background image), and a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed with the transition of the background image. I was able to do it. However, the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) may be executed in response to a comment preview effect in which a comment (comment image) is displayed. This comment preview performance is determined by a lottery on the sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91). This allows randomness to be given to the timing at which the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) is started. According to this configuration, the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed based on the lottery of the sub-control board 90 (the performance control microcomputer 91), triggered by a comment preview performance in which a comment (comment image) is displayed. Therefore, the state of the setting suggestion performance can be controlled by lottery (in other words, distribution by lottery) of the sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control).

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 40(I) and 40(J), the city image HG1 (first A background image change notice effect is performed to switch to the spacecraft interior image HG2 (second background image), which is a special background image different from the background image), and a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed with the transition of the background image. I was able to do it. However, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) may be executed when the second movable accessory 15, which is a movable body, moves from the retreat position to the advanced position. The movable body performance in which the second movable accessory 15, which is a movable body, moves from the retreat position to the advanced position is determined by a lottery of the sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91). The second movable accessory 15 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 moves downward from this first state (retracted state in the retracted position) toward the center of the display screen 7a, and stops at the center of the display screen 7a as an advanced position (deployment position). (Second aspect). The second movable accessory 15 can be moved upward (retracted) from this second mode (advanced state at the advanced position) to the retracted position, and can come to rest there. There is. Furthermore, when a movable accessory (movable object) such as the second movable accessory 15 is activated, the variable production (variable display) of multiple performance symbols ends, compared to when the movable accessory (movable object) is not activated. This suggests to the player that there is a high expectation that a win will occur after the game has been played (that is, after a plurality of performance symbols are stopped and displayed). Therefore, the player has a high interest in the operation of the movable accessory (movable body) such as the second movable accessory 15. This allows randomness to be given to the timing at which the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) is started. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) using the movable body performance as a trigger by lottery of the sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91). Control to change the state of the setting suggestion performance can be performed by lottery (in other words, distribution by lottery) of the sub control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control). In addition, the movable body may be a movable body provided in the front frame 53, in addition to a movable body such as the second movable accessory 15, which is provided on the game board 2.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change performance M of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. 38 and the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. ) reaches a certain number of times of 220, the display of the current setting suggestion performance state (display of the current setting suggestion performance state) is terminated. However, the more advantageous the setting information is to the player, the larger the fixed number of times may be. The setting information is information that is set in six stages, settings 1 to 6. For example, when setting the constant rotation speed to 55 times, 110 times, or 220 times, when setting the constant rotation speed to 55 times, the setting information is setting 1 or setting 2, and the constant rotation speed is set to 55 times. When setting the constant rotation speed to 110 times, the setting information is more advantageous to the player than when setting the constant rotation speed to 55 times, and it is setting 3 or setting 4. When the constant rotation speed is set to 220 times, the constant rotation speed is The setting information is more advantageous to the player than when the number is set to 110, and the setting is setting 5 or setting 6. For example, when setting the constant number of rotations to one of 55 times, 85 times, 110 times, 145 times, 185 times, and 220 times, when setting the constant number of rotations to 55 times, the setting information is set. 1, and when the constant number of rotations is set to 85 times, the setting information is more advantageous to the player than when the constant number of rotations is set to 55 times, which is setting 2, and the constant number of rotations is set to 110 times. When setting, the setting information is more advantageous to the player than when setting the constant number of rotations to 85 times, and is setting 3, and when setting the constant number of rotations to 145 times, the constant number of rotations is set to 110 times. The setting information is more advantageous for the player than when the constant rotation speed is set to 185 times, and the setting information is more advantageous to the player than when the constant rotation speed is set to 145 times. Setting 5 is advantageous, and setting information is more advantageous for the player when the constant number of rotations is set to 220 times than when setting the constant number of rotations to 185 times, which is setting 6. In this way, the more advantageous the setting information is to the player, the greater the predetermined number of times. In this way, the more advantageous the setting information is to the player, the greater the fixed number of times remaining. Thereby, the rotation speed itself, which is a certain number of times, can be used as a suggestion of the setting information.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the state change effects M of the setting suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 38(B), (D), and (J), the state change effects M of the setting suggestion effects shown in FIGS. In the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance in (J) and the state change performance O of the setting suggestion performance in FIGS. 40(C) and (J), the state display image of the setting suggestion performance was displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the content of the status display image of the setting suggestion effect may be played as audio from the speaker 67. For example, when it is the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, the content of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1 setting normal", so this "state 1 setting normal" is played from the speaker 67. Good too. In this way, the change in the state of the setting suggestion performance (transition result) can be communicated to the player by voice.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 40(B), (C), (F), and (G), the white spherical hold icon 9A changes to the treasure chest hold icon 9A. When the hold icon 9A of the treasure box changes from a closed state to an open state, this is used as an opportunity to start displaying the state of the setting suggestion performance. However, instead of the treasure chest icon, for example, either an ally character or an enemy character that appears in a battle scene appears with an icon, and then when the character's size changes or the character's pose changes. Occasionally, this may be used as an opportunity to start displaying the status of the setting suggestion effect.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change performance M of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. (Notification) When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect that can be displayed is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed after that, except for the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy". The screen 7a gradually becomes transparent and disappears, and the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" decreases in size toward the status display area JH formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the user finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image "Status Change" that was displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH, and "Status 2" appears at the top of the status display area JH. In the lower row of the status display area JH, a character image "50 times remaining" was displayed in upper and lower rows, respectively. However, as the state of the setting suggestion performance, a state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion performance is displayed that intentionally suggests (notifies) the player that the state is ``state 2'' even though it is actually ``state 3''. After that, the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a, except for the character image "Condition 2 Setting High Accuracy", and then the message "Condition 2 Setting High Accuracy" is displayed on the screen 7a. When the character image moves toward the status display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image moves to the status display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. The text image "Status change" that had been displayed disappears from the status display area JH, the text image "Status 3" appears at the top of the status display area JH, and the text image "50 times remaining" appears at the bottom of the status display area JH. may be displayed separately in upper and lower rows. By doing this, since the transition result of the state change may not be confirmed until it is displayed in the state display area JH, the transition of the state change is not confirmed at the stage when the state display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. First, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that makes it appear as if a further state change transition occurred after the character image moved. Note that this can also be applied to the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 39 and the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change performance M of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. 38, the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. 39, and the state change performance O of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. When the remaining number of times displayed in the area JH becomes zero, "zero times remaining" is displayed, the display of the status of the setting suggestion effect is finished, the status display area JH disappears from the display screen 7a, and with this as an opportunity, The state of the setting suggestion performance was initialized to "state 1". However, instead of setting it to "state 1", the state of the setting suggestion effect at the time when "zero times remaining" is displayed may be stepped down by one step. For example, if the state of the setting suggestion effect at the time when "zero times remaining" is displayed is "state 3", it may be set to "state 2" which is one step down from "state 3". Note that when the state of the setting suggestion performance at the time when "zero times remaining" is displayed is "state 1", the state becomes "state 1".

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the state change effect M of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 38, the state change effect N of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 39, and the state change effect O of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. The state of the suggestion effect (any state among "state 1" to "state 4") is set in the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 provided. was starting to be displayed. However, instead of the image display device 7, the state of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed in the display area of another image display device provided on the game board 2, or the status of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed on a sub display device provided in the door frame 53. The state of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed on the screen. Other image display devices provided on the game board 2 may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, a dot matrix, or other image display device. For example, when a decorative member is fixed to the center decorative body 10 at the lower right of the image display device 7, the image display device is provided at the center of this decorative member. Further, the sub-display device includes a right sub-display device, a left sub-display device, and an upper sub-display device. The right sub-display device is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display device is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display device is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display device and the left sub-display device are arranged at paired positions with the game board 2 interposed therebetween. The upper sub-display device is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display device, the left sub-display device, and the upper sub-display device are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub display device may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The state of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on one of the right sub display device, left sub display device, and upper sub display device that constitute the sub display device. In addition, as another image display device provided on the game board 2, when a decorative member is fixed to the center decoration body 10, a predetermined image may be printed in advance instead of the image display device provided on the center decoration body 10. The display device may include a printing member and a built-in backlight (a plurality of light emitting means) arranged behind the printing member. Thereby, a predetermined image can be displayed by causing the built-in backlight (light emitting means) to emit light. A plurality of printing members having predetermined images printed thereon may be provided so that the predetermined images corresponding to the emitted light colors of the built-in backlight (light emitting means) are respectively displayed. In this case, the predetermined images printed on the plurality of printing members are different images. In this way, the emitted light color of the built-in backlight (light emitting means) can be changed to, for example, red (first light emitting means), green (second light emitting means), blue (third light emitting means), white (fourth light emitting means), etc. When the built-in backlight (first light emitting means) emits red light, a predetermined image printed on the first printing member with red light emission (first predetermined image "State 1") is displayed. ") is displayed, and when the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) emits green light, a predetermined image ("state 2" which is the second predetermined image) printed on the second printing member with green light emission is displayed. ) is displayed and the built-in backlight (third light emitting means) emits blue light, a predetermined image printed on the third printing member with blue light emission ("state 3" which is the third predetermined image) is displayed, and when the built-in backlight (fourth light emitting means) emits white light, a predetermined image (“state 4” which is the fourth predetermined image) printed on the fourth printing member with white light emission is displayed. Is displayed. In this way, by emitting light from the built-in backlight, the state of the setting suggestion effect (any state among "state 1" to "state 4") can be displayed as a predetermined image. Of course, when the built-in backlight is off, the predetermined image is not displayed, so the current state of the setting suggestion effect (any state from "state 1" to "state 4") becomes hidden.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the state change performance M of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. 38, the state change performance N of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. 39, and the state change performance O of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. Some parts may not be provided, or other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect 5-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a drawing with a lottery probability according to the setting information when drawing a drawing when game balls enter the game,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that makes suggestions based on the setting information,
having a plurality of setting suggestion presentation states in which settings regarding the setting suggestion presentation are different from each other;
The setting suggestion performance is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states,
It is possible to execute a transition process of transitioning from a first state of the setting suggestion performance states to a second state in which the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player compared to the first state;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 5-1,
When the number of drawings reaches a specific number, executing the transition process;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 5-2,
executing the transition process by changing the specific number of times to a random number of times;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect 5-2,
After the lottery result is a win and a gaming state advantageous to the player ends, changing the specific number of times and executing the transition process;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 5-1 to 5-4,
executing the transition process when the pending icon becomes a specific icon and the display mode of the specific icon changes;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 5-1 to 5-5,
A background image change notice effect for switching from a first background image to a second background image different from the first background image is performed, and the transition process is executed at the transition of the background image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 5-1 to 5-6,
Executing the transition process triggered by a comment preview performance in which a comment is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 5-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 5-1 to 5-7,
When the number of times the lottery is drawn reaches a certain number, the display of the current setting suggestion presentation state is ended;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 5-9]
The gaming machine according to aspect 5-8,
In the transition process, the more advantageous the setting information is to the player, the greater the certain number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The state change effects P to Q of the setting suggestion effect will be explained below using FIGS. 41 to 43. In FIGS. 41 to 43, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings. FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the continuation of the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. 41, and FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance. It is a diagram for explaining the state change performance Q of the performance.

As mentioned above, the state change performance of this setting suggestion performance is based on the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion performance and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance ( The states of the setting suggestion performance that are associated with (reliability rate) are defined as four states, state 1 to state 4, and the state is stepped up one by one toward state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4. The state of the setting suggestion effect changes by jumping up or jumping up (for example, jumping up from state 1 to state 3), creating a new game experience in which the player aims for state 4. It is intended to give. Of course, the states of the setting suggestion effect include, as mentioned above, in addition to stepping up or jumping up one by one from state 1, state 2, state 3, and then towards state 4. It may also step down or jump down (for example, jump down from state 3 to state 1).

The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a state change effect of the setting suggestion effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

Here, first, the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance and the state change performance Q of the setting suggestion performance will be explained in order. The state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance and the state change performance Q of the setting suggestion performance are state change performance permissions held in the built-in RAM of the RTC 95 of the performance control microcomputer 91 by the CPU 92 of the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90. Information, start/end information, and current date/time information (hereinafter referred to as "current date/time information") are acquired, and the process is performed based on the various types of information acquired. Here, since the state change performance permission information is set to "ON", the state change performance of the setting suggestion performance can be performed, and the start and end information includes time zone information, information on the number of days elapsed since introduction, and a specific day of the week. It is assumed that among the information and specific day information, time zone information is set.

The state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance is performed at regular intervals (in multiple time periods) from 10:00 until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. The difference is that the state change performance Q of the setting suggestion performance is performed from 18:00 to 22:00 (in a single time period).

[Status change performance P of setting suggestion performance]
The state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect will be explained with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. First, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the statically displayed performance symbols move slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode. Later on (in other words, after the stop display of the performance design is released and the performance design is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), the speed gradually increases from low speed toward the bottom and changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state. The display mode changes to a transparent state and changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the performance pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production design decelerates just before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). . When the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, they move gradually and slowly in the vertical direction.

To briefly explain the fluctuating icons and hold icons, for example, as shown in FIG. 41(A), they correspond to the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R that are currently changing as the expiration of the first special symbol reservation. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second special figure reservation is provided. A second hold display area is provided as a second hold display area. In the first hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Ad. In the second hold display area, although not shown, hold icons 9B can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be displayed. It is now possible to stock up. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a so-called left-handed game), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is The 4 hold display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, while the 1st hold display position 9Bd to the 4th hold display position 9Bd of the hold icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the left-handed When playing a game, a hold icon 9B exists and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). In addition, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is played. 4. The hold display position 9Ad is hidden on the display screen 7a (of course, when playing the game of right-hand hitting, the hold icon 9A exists and is displayed on the display screen 7a until it is completed). Then, the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd of the hold icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

After turning on the power of the game machine 1, the player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. When it moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 41(A). Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and a state where only one hold icon 9A is stocked without being digested remains. becomes.

Thereafter, during the change, when the current time reaches 10:00, the setting suggestion changes until 10:45 (that is, for 45 minutes), as shown in FIG. 41(B). The state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect that can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the effect is started and that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1" has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape. is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The status display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 1 Setting Normal" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance is arranged on the near side of the variation area of the left production pattern 8L, the variation area of the middle production pattern 8C, and the variation area of the right production pattern 8R. As a result, although the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect overlaps with a part of the area on the right side of the fluctuation area of the left effect pattern 8L in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is the left effect. It is not obstructed by the symbol 8L and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is in a state where it straddles the fluctuation area of the medium effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction. Although it overlaps with the fluctuation area in the front and back direction, the setting suggestion effect status display image JM1 is not obstructed by the middle effect pattern 8C and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape of the setting suggestion effect status display image JM1 is similar to the right effect. Although it overlaps with a part of the left side of the variation area of the symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance is not obstructed by the right performance symbol 8R and is not difficult to see.

A state 1 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 1 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, and "state 1 settings" is placed in front of this state 1 display background image. An image of the text "Normal" is placed. The background image for displaying state 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1 setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to be seen through the state 1 display background image. Note that the background image for displaying state 1 may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal." In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

When the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears), and the status display area JH, which is displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a, is displayed. The character image "Normal" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and when it finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image "Status 1" appears in the status display area JH. is displayed. In other words, in the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal", the information "Status 1" is reflected as is, whereas the information "Setting Normal" is not reflected. By displaying "state 1" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a until 10:45. It has become. During this period until 10:45, the state of the setting suggestion presentation may change. Here, first, "state 1" is set as the state of the setting suggestion performance, and it is made clear to the player that "state 1" will remain.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect (reliability rate) are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

Although the status display area JH overlaps with the downstream side of the variation area of the right effect pattern 8R in the front-rear direction, the status display area JH is arranged at the frontmost side like the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, it is not obstructed by the right presentation pattern 8R and is not difficult to see. Further, a dedicated status display area background image (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the status display area JH. The background image for the status display area has a design and contrast set and is opaque in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1". This makes it difficult to see the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH through the status display area background image. Note that the background image for the status display area may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1". In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH can be visually recognized through the status display area background image.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 41(C), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "2", and when the symbols with the same number do not line up, it is then stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 41(D), the effect is A variation effect (variation display) of the symbols is started. As a result, there is no stock of pending icons 9A that have not been consumed. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed multiple times. By confirming the loss, there will be a series of losses instead of successes.

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (plays a game called left-handed hitting), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbol is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. , the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and there are only three pending icons 9A that have not been digested and are stocked. becomes.

Thereafter, during the fluctuation, when the current time reaches 10:20, as shown in FIG. 41(E), it is suggested (notified) to the player that "state 1" is the state of the setting suggestion effect. The status display image JM1 of the above-mentioned setting suggestion performance that can be performed is displayed (appears) again in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a.

When the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves toward the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves while reducing the size of the character and finally moves to the status display area JH, a character image "Status 1" is displayed in the status display area JH. In other words, in the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal", the information "Status 1" is reflected as is, whereas the information "Setting Normal" is not reflected. By displaying "state 1" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance will be displayed on the display screen 7a until 10:45. It has become. During this period until 10:45, the state of the setting suggestion presentation may change. Here, it is made clear to the player that "state 1" will continue to be the state of the setting suggestion performance.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

After that, in this variation, as shown in FIG. 41(F), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "6", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "7", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. A variation effect (variation display) of the symbols is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. , and only two pending icons 9A remain in stock without being consumed. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed multiple times. By confirming the loss, there will be a series of losses instead of successes.

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (plays a game called left-handed hitting), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbol is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. , and only two pending icons 9A remain in stock without being consumed.

Thereafter, during the fluctuation, when the current time reaches 10:40, as shown in FIG. 41(H), it is suggested (notified) to the player that "state 2" is the state of the setting suggestion effect. A status display image JM2 of a setting suggestion effect that can be performed has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM2 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect has the same configuration as the state display image JM1 of the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 2 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 2 is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. On the front side of this background image for displaying state 2, a text image that reads "state 2 setting high accuracy" is arranged. The background image for state 2 display has a design and contrast set and is opaque in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy".

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image "Status Change". At this time, in this embodiment, the above-described background image for the status display area is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the status display area JH. Instead, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in state will occur.

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen, except for the character image "Condition 2 Setting High Accuracy". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears from 7a. At this time, the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing its size, the character image "Status Change" that was displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH. , a character image "Status 2" is displayed in the status display area JH. In other words, in the character image "State 2 Setting High Accuracy", the information "State 2" is reflected as is, whereas the information "Setting High Accuracy" is not reflected. By displaying "state 2" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance will be displayed on the display screen 7a until 10:45. It has become. During this period until 10:45, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is clearly shown to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is transited to "state 2" and that "state 2" is to be stayed.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2," the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect (reliability rate) are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 41(I), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "4", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "8", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. A variation effect (variation display) of the symbols is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and a state where only one hold icon 9A is stocked without being digested remains. becomes. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed multiple times. By confirming the loss, there will be a series of losses instead of successes.

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (plays a game called left-handed hitting), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbol is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and a state where only one hold icon 9A is stocked without being digested remains. becomes.

Thereafter, during the change, when the current time reaches 10:45, the state display area JH in which "state 2" was displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 41(K). This completes the status display of the setting suggestion effect. In other words, the status display from the time when the current time during the fluctuation in FIG. 41(B) becomes 10:00 until the current time during the fluctuation in FIG. 41(K) becomes 10:45. The state of the setting suggestion performance can be changed during a specific time period of 45 minutes. When the state display of the setting suggestion performance is completed, this is used as an opportunity to initialize the state of the setting suggestion performance to "state 1".

After that, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed multiple times. By confirming the loss, there will be a series of losses instead of successes.

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (plays a game called left-handed hitting), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbol is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and a state where only one hold icon 9A is stocked without being digested remains. becomes.

Thereafter, during the fluctuation, when the current time reaches 11:00, the setting suggestion changes until 11:45 (that is, for 45 minutes), as shown in FIG. 41(L). The state display image JM1 of the above-mentioned setting suggestion performance that can suggest (inform) the player that the state display of the performance has started again and is in “state 1” as the state of the setting suggestion performance has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape. is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a.

When the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the above-mentioned status display area JH is displayed (appears) again, and the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves towards the status display area JH. When it moves while reducing its size, and finally moves to the status display area JH, a character image "Status 1" is displayed in the status display area JH. In other words, in the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal", the information "Status 1" is reflected as is, whereas the information "Setting Normal" is not reflected. By displaying "state 1" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a until 11:45. It has become. During this period until 11:45, the state of the setting suggestion presentation may change. Here, first, "state 1" is set as the state of the setting suggestion performance, and it is made clear to the player that "state 1" will remain.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect (reliability rate) are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 42(M), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "4", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then the number is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. A variation effect (variation display) of the symbols is started. Along with this, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and there is no stock of pending icons 9A that have not been consumed. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed multiple times. By confirming the loss, there will be a series of losses instead of successes.

Thereafter, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbol is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. , the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and there are only three pending icons 9A that have not been digested and are stocked. becomes.

Thereafter, during the fluctuation, when the current time reaches 11:20, as shown in FIG. 42(O), it is suggested (notified) to the player that "state 2" is the state of the setting suggestion effect. The status display image JM2 of the above-mentioned setting suggestion performance that can be performed is displayed (appears) again in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a.

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image "Status Change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned background image for the status display area is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the status display area JH. Instead, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in state will occur.

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen, except for the character image "Condition 2 Setting High Accuracy". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears from 7a. At this time, the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing its size, the character image "Status Change" that was displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH. , a character image "Status 2" is displayed in the status display area JH. In other words, in the character image "State 2 Setting Highly Accurate", the information "State 2" is reflected as is, whereas the information "State Setting Highly Accurate" is not reflected. By displaying "state 2" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance will be displayed on the display screen 7a until 11:45. It has become. During this period until 11:45, the state of the setting suggestion presentation may change. Here, it is clearly shown to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is transited to "state 2" and that "state 2" is to be stayed.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect (reliability rate) are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 42(P), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "7", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "0", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 42(T), the effect is A variation effect (variation display) of the symbols is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. , and there are only two pending icons 9A in stock without being consumed. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed multiple times. By confirming the loss, there will be a series of losses instead of successes.

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (plays a game called left-handed hitting), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbol is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. , and there are only two pending icons 9A in stock without being consumed.

Thereafter, during the fluctuation, when the current time reaches 11:40, as shown in FIG. 42(R), it is suggested (notified) to the player that "state 3" is the state of the setting suggestion effect. A status display image JM3 of a setting suggestion effect that can be performed has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The status display image JM3 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion performance status display image JM3 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion performance status display image JM1 described above and the setting suggestion performance status display image JM2 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 3 display background image (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. On the front side of this background image for displaying state 3, a character image reading "state 3 setting high confidence" is placed. The background image for displaying state 3 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 3 setting high confidence".

When the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image "Status Change". At this time, in this embodiment, the above-described background image for the status display area is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the status display area JH. Instead, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in state will occur.

When the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears from 7a. At this time, the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing its size, the character image "Status Change" that was displayed in the status display area JH disappears from the status display area JH. , a character image "Status 3" is displayed in the status display area JH. In other words, in the character image "State 3 Setting High Confidence", the information "State 3" is reflected as is, whereas the information "Setting High Confidence" is not reflected. By displaying "state 3" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a until 11:45. It has become. During this period until 11:45, the state of the setting suggestion presentation may change. Here, it is clearly shown to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is transited to "state 3" and that "state 3" is to be stayed.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3," the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 8 to 13.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 42(S), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then the number is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 42(T), the effect is A variation effect (variation display) of the symbols is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and a state where only one hold icon 9A is stocked without being digested remains. becomes. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed multiple times. By confirming the loss, there will be a series of losses instead of successes.

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (plays a game called left-handed hitting), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbol is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and a state where only one hold icon 9A is stocked without being digested remains. becomes.

Thereafter, during the fluctuation, when the current time reaches 11:45, the state display area JH in which "state 3" was displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 42(U). This completes the status display of the setting suggestion effect. In other words, the status display from the time when the current time during the fluctuation in FIG. 41(L) becomes 11:00 until the current time during the fluctuation in FIG. 42(U) becomes 11:45. The state of the setting suggestion performance can be changed during a specific time period of 45 minutes. When the state display of the setting suggestion performance is completed, this is used as an opportunity to initialize the state of the setting suggestion performance to "state 1".

After that, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed multiple times. By confirming the loss, there will be a series of losses instead of successes.

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (plays a game called left-handed hitting), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbol is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and a state where only one hold icon 9A is stocked without being digested remains. becomes.

Thereafter, during the fluctuation, when the current time reaches 12:00, the setting suggestion changes until 12:45 (that is, for 45 minutes), as shown in FIG. 42(V). The state display image JM1 of the above-mentioned setting suggestion performance that can suggest (inform) the player that the state display of the performance has started again and is in “state 1” as the state of the setting suggestion performance has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape. is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a.

When the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the above-mentioned status display area JH is displayed (appears) again, and the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves towards the status display area JH. When it moves while reducing its size, and finally moves to the status display area JH, a character image "Status 1" is displayed in the status display area JH. In other words, in the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal", the information "Status 1" is reflected as is, whereas the information "Setting Normal" is not reflected. By displaying "state 1" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a until 12:45. It has become. During this period until 12:45, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, first, "state 1" is set as the state of the setting suggestion performance, and it is made clear to the player that "state 1" will remain.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

After that, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned to the same numerical pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, When the right performance symbols 8R align with the symbols of the same number and are stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed, and thereafter a winning game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

In the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 92 of the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 acquires the current date and time information from the RTC 95 of the performance control microcomputer 91, Based on the acquired current date and time information, this is carried out from 10:00 until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. In other words, the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance starts from 10:00 when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, and continues from 10:00 until the gaming machine 1 is powered off. If there is, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change when the hours and minutes are "00 minutes", "20 minutes", or "40 minutes", and the state of the setting suggestion effect may change depending on the specific time period from "00 minutes" to "45 minutes". For 45 minutes (status display period), the state of the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the state display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and during this state display period, the state of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. It is now possible to clearly indicate the stay to the player.

In addition, in the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance, the state of each setting suggestion performance in Figs. 41 (B), (E), (H), (L) and Fig. 42 (O), (R), (V) The display image is displayed on the display screen 7a based on what has been determined in the state transition process shown in FIG. 23.

In addition, in the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance, for example, in FIG. The status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a, except for the character image "Setting Normal". At this time, the text image "Status 1 Setting Normal" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the text, and finally When the user moved to the status display area JH, a character image "Status 1" was displayed in the status display area JH. However, when the character image "Status 1 Settings Normal" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image "Status 2 Settings High You may jump up to ``. By doing this, the contents of the text image "Status 1 Setting Normal" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a and the text image displayed when moving to the status display area JH will change. In some cases, when the player's line of sight moves not only to the text image "Status 1 Settings Normal" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a, but also to the status display area JH. Since it is possible to point to a character image, it is possible to arouse the player's sense of anticipation regarding the change in the state of the setting suggestion performance.

[Status change performance Q of setting suggestion performance]
Next, the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 43. First, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the statically displayed performance symbols move slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode. Later on (in other words, after the static display of the performance design is released and the performance design is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), the speed gradually increases from low speed toward the bottom and changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state. The display mode changes to a transparent state and changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the performance pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production design decelerates just before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). . When the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, they move gradually and slowly in the vertical direction.

To briefly explain the fluctuating icons and pending icons, for example, as shown in FIG. 43(A), they correspond to the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which are currently changing as the expiry of the first special figure hold. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second special figure reservation is provided. A second hold display area is provided as a second hold display area. In the first hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Ad. In the second hold display area, although not shown, hold icons 9B can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be displayed. It is now possible to stock up. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a so-called left-handed game), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is The 4 hold display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, while the 1st hold display position 9Bd to the 4th hold display position 9Bd of the hold icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the left-handed When playing a game, a hold icon 9B exists and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). In addition, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is played. 4. The hold display position 9Ad is hidden on the display screen 7a (of course, when playing the game of right-hand hitting, the hold icon 9A exists and is displayed on the display screen 7a until it is completed). Then, the first to fourth pending display positions 9Bd to 9Bd of the pending icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

After turning on the power of the game machine 1, the player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. When it moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 43(A). Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and a state where only one hold icon 9A is stocked without being digested remains. becomes.

Thereafter, during the change, when the current time reaches 18:00, the setting suggestion changes until the current time reaches 22:00 (that is, for 4 hours). The state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect that can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the effect is started and that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1" has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape. is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The status display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 1 Setting Normal" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance is arranged on the near side of the variation area of the left production pattern 8L, the variation area of the middle production pattern 8C, and the variation area of the right production pattern 8R. As a result, although the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect overlaps with a part of the area on the right side of the fluctuation area of the left effect pattern 8L in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is the left effect. It is not obstructed by the symbol 8L and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is in a state where it straddles the fluctuation area of the medium effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction. Although it overlaps with the fluctuation area in the front and back direction, the setting suggestion effect status display image JM1 is not obstructed by the middle effect pattern 8C and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape of the setting suggestion effect status display image JM1 is similar to the right effect. Although it overlaps with a part of the left side of the variation area of the symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance is not obstructed by the right performance symbol 8R and is not difficult to see.

A state 1 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 1 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, and "state 1 settings" is placed in front of this state 1 display background image. An image of the text "Normal" is placed. The background image for displaying state 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1 setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to be seen through the state 1 display background image. Note that the background image for displaying state 1 may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal." In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

When the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears), and the status display area JH, which is displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a, is displayed. The character image "Normal" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and when it finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image "Status 1" appears in the status display area JH. is displayed. In other words, in the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal", the information "Status 1" is reflected as is, whereas the information "Setting Normal" is not reflected. By displaying "state 1" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a until 22:00. It has become. During this period until 22:00, the state of the setting suggestion presentation may change. Here, first, "state 1" is set as the state of the setting suggestion performance, and it is made clear to the player that "state 1" will remain.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 1" are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

Although the status display area JH overlaps with the downstream side of the variation area of the right effect pattern 8R in the front-rear direction, the status display area JH is arranged at the frontmost side like the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, it is not obstructed by the right presentation pattern 8R and is not difficult to see. Further, a dedicated status display area background image (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the status display area JH. The background image for the status display area has a design and contrast set and is opaque in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1". This makes it difficult to see the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH through the status display area background image. Note that the background image for the status display area may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1". In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH can be visually recognized through the status display area background image.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 43(C), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "2", and when the symbols with the same number do not line up, it is then stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. 43(D), the effect is A variation effect (variation display) of the symbols is started. As a result, there is no stock of pending icons 9A that have not been consumed. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed multiple times. By confirming the loss, there will be a series of losses instead of successes.

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (plays a game called left-handed hitting), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbol is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. , and there are only two pending icons 9A in stock without being consumed.

Thereafter, during the fluctuation, when the current time reaches 18:30, as shown in FIG. 43(E), it is suggested (notified) to the player that "state 3" is the state of the setting suggestion effect. A status display image JM3 of a setting suggestion effect that can be performed has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The status display image JM3 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect has the same configuration as the state display image JM1 of the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 3 display background image (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of this background image for displaying state 3, a character image reading "state 3 setting high confidence" is placed. The background image for displaying state 3 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 3 setting high confidence".

When the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image "Status Change". At this time, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned background image for the status display area is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the status display area JH. Instead, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in state will occur.

When the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears from 7a. At this time, the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the character, a character image "Status 3" is displayed in the status display area JH. In other words, in the character image "State 3 Setting High Confidence", the information "State 3" is reflected as is, whereas the information "Setting High Confidence" is not reflected. By displaying "state 3" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a until 22:00. It has become. During this period until 22:00, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is clearly shown to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is transited to "state 3" and that "state 3" is to be stayed.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3," the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 8 to 13.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 43(F), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "6", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then the number is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 43(G), the effect is A variation effect (variation display) of the symbols is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and a state where only one hold icon 9A is stocked without being digested remains. becomes. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed multiple times. By confirming the loss, there will be a series of losses instead of successes.

Thereafter, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbol is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. , the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and there are only three pending icons 9A that have not been digested and are stocked. becomes.

Thereafter, during the fluctuation, when the current time reaches 21:30, as shown in FIG. 43(H), it is suggested (notified) to the player that "state 2" is the state of the setting suggestion effect. A status display image JM2 of a setting suggestion effect that can be performed has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM2 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion performance status display image JM2 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion performance status display image JM1 described above and the setting suggestion performance status display image JM3 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 2 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 2 is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. On the front side of this background image for displaying state 2, a text image that reads "state 2 setting high accuracy" is arranged. The background image for displaying state 2 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy".

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is switched to a character image "Status Change". At this time, in this embodiment, the above-described background image for the status display area is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the status display area JH. Instead, a dedicated state change background image (not shown) may be arranged from the state display area background image. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in state will occur.

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen, except for the character image "Condition 2 Setting High Accuracy". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears from 7a. At this time, the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing its size, a character image "STATUS 2" is displayed in the status display area JH. In other words, in the character image "State 2 Setting High Accuracy", the information "State 2" is reflected as is, whereas the information "Setting High Accuracy" is not reflected. By displaying "state 2" in the state display area JH, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a until 22:00. It has become. During this period until 22:00, the state of the setting suggestion effect may change. Here, it is clearly shown to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is transited to "state 2" and that "state 2" is to be stayed.

Here, since the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 1", the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion performance and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance (reliability rate) associated with "state 2" are Based on this, setting suggestion effects will be performed. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

After that, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed multiple times. By confirming the loss, there will be a series of losses instead of successes.

Thereafter, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbol is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. , and only two pending icons 9A remain in stock without being consumed.

Thereafter, during the fluctuation, when the current time reaches 21:59, the message image MS has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is placed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 43(I). be displayed (appear). This message image MS is an image that announces the end of the status display of the setting suggestion performance, includes a text image saying "Status display will end soon", and is placed at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. In other words, the message image MS is arranged on the near side of the variable area of the left effect pattern 8L, the variable area of the middle effect pattern 8C, and the variable area of the right effect pattern 8R. As a result, although the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the message image MS overlaps in the front-rear direction a part of the area on the right side of the fluctuation area of the left effect pattern 8L, the message image MS is not obstructed by the left effect pattern 8L and does not become difficult to see. Furthermore, although the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the message image MS crosses the variable area of the medium effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction and overlaps the variable area of the medium effect pattern 8C in the front and back direction, the message image MS is a medium effect pattern. It is not obstructed by the symbol 8C and is not difficult to see, and although the horizontally long rectangular shape of the message image MS overlaps a part of the left side of the fluctuation area of the right production symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the message image MS is not obstructed by the right production symbol 8R. It will not be obstructed by the weather and will not be difficult to see.

A background image for a message image (not shown) is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the message image MS, and a text image saying "Status display will end soon" is arranged in front of this background image for the message image. ing. The background image for the message image is opaque with a design and contrast set to improve the visibility of the text image "Status display will end soon." This makes it difficult to see the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the message image MS through the message image background image. Note that the background image for the message image may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "Status display will end soon." In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the message image MS can be visually recognized through the message image background image. Note that when the text image "Status display will end soon", which is the message image MS, is displayed on the display screen 7a, a voice saying "Status display will end soon", which is the content of this text image, is output from the speaker 67. It flows from Thereby, the player can be informed by voice that the status display will soon end.

After the message image MS is displayed for a predetermined period of time (15 seconds in this embodiment), the message image MS disappears from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, during the fluctuation, when the current time reaches 22:00, the state display area JH in which "state 2" was displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 43(J). This completes the status display of the setting suggestion effect. In other words, the status display from the time when the current time during the fluctuation in FIG. 43(B) becomes 18:00 until the current time during the fluctuation in FIG. 43(J) becomes 22:00. The state of the setting suggestion performance can change during a specific time period of 4 hours and 00 minutes. When the state display of the setting suggestion performance is completed, this is used as an opportunity to initialize the state of the setting suggestion performance to "state 1".

After that, in this variation, as shown in FIG. 43(K), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "4", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "8", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. 43(L), the effect is A variation effect (variation display) of the symbols is started. Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and a state where only one hold icon 9A is stocked without being digested remains. becomes.

After that, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned to the same numerical pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, When the right performance symbols 8R align with the symbols of the same number and are stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed, and thereafter a winning game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

In the state change performance Q of the setting suggestion performance, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 92 of the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 acquires the current date and time information from the RTC 95 of the performance control microcomputer 91, Based on the acquired current date and time information, the state of the setting suggestion presentation can be changed from 18:00 to 22:00. In other words, in the state change performance Q of the setting suggestion performance, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, during a specific time period of 4 hours 00 minutes, which is the status display period extending from 18:00 to 22:00, The state of the setting suggestion performance is displayed in the state display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and during this state display period, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the setting suggestion performance will remain in the state. ing. In other words, in the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect, when the specific start time of 18:00 is reached, the status display of the setting suggestion effect is started, and when the specific end time of 22:00 is reached, the setting suggestion effect is displayed. The status display of the suggestion effect is terminated.

In the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect, the state display images of each setting suggestion effect in FIGS. It is displayed on the display screen 7a based on this.

In addition, in the state change performance Q of the setting suggestion performance, for example, in FIG. The status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a, except for the character image "Setting High Accuracy". At this time, the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the character moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, the character image "Status 2" is displayed in the status display area JH. However, when the text image "Condition 2 Setting High Accuracy" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the text, and finally moves to the status display area JH, the text image "Condition 3 Setting High You may jump up to "Shin". By doing this, the contents of the text image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a and the text image displayed when moving to the status display area JH will change. Therefore, when the player's line of sight moves not only to the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a, but also to the status display area JH, Since it is possible to point the player to the character image to be displayed, it is possible to arouse the player's sense of anticipation regarding the change in the state of the setting suggestion performance.

[Effect example]
Below, examples of effects of the state change effects P to Q of the setting suggestion effects are shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, and the state change performance Q of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. At the time of a lottery ("winning" or "losing" lottery) associated with the ball entering the 20th ball, the setting information is referred to and the lottery is performed with a lottery probability according to the setting information. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance (the setting suggestion performance determination process in FIG. 24) that makes suggestions based on setting information, and has a plurality of setting suggestion performance states in which the settings related to the setting suggestion performance are different from each other. It is designed to be executed based on one of the setting suggestion presentation states. It has time information that specifies the elapsed time since the power was turned on. A transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) for transitioning from the first state of the setting suggestion performance states to the second state where the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player compared to the first state is performed based on time information. It is now possible to run it. By executing the transition process based on time information (the state transition process in FIG. 23), for example, in the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect in FIG. In the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 43(E), the state changes from ``state 1 setting normal'' to ``state 3 setting high confidence''. According to this configuration, the transition process for transitioning from the first state of the setting suggestion presentation states to the second state where the setting suggestion presentation can be an advantageous presentation for the player compared to the first state is performed from the time the power is turned on. Since it can be executed based on time information that specifies the elapsed time, in addition to notifying players of the winning and losing results of the lottery, it also informs players of the results of the lottery. It is possible to provide the player with a new game experience in which the player aims to transition from the first state to the second state. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 41(B), (E), (H), (L) and FIGS. , based on the time information, 10:00, 10:20, 10:40, 11:00, 11:20, 11:40, 12:00, etc. If it is after that, the transition process (state transition process in Figure 23) can be executed when a specific time such as ``00 minutes'', ``20 minutes'', or ``40 minutes'' is reached. ing. Also, in the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 43(B) to (J), when a specific time of 18:00 is reached based on the time information, the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed. It is now possible to execute. According to this configuration, based on the time information that specifies the elapsed time since the power is turned on, when a specific time is reached (in other words, in conjunction with the time information output from the real-time clock RTC95), the transition occurs. Since the process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed, time information that specifies the elapsed time from power-on (in other words, time information output from the RTC95, which is a real-time clock) Control can be performed to change the state of the setting suggestion performance in conjunction with the .

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 41(B) to 41(K), the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. When a predetermined period of 45 minutes has elapsed, the display of the current setting suggestion presentation state can be ended. When a certain period of time of 45 minutes has elapsed, the status display area JH in which the status was displayed disappears from the display screen 7a in the status change performance P of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. 41(K). In addition, in the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. When the period (up to 00 minutes) has elapsed, the display of the current setting suggestion performance state (display of the current setting suggestion performance state) can be ended. When a certain period of time of 4 hours has elapsed, the state display area JH in which the state was displayed disappears from the display screen 7a in the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 43(J). According to this configuration, the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed based on the time information that specifies the elapsed time since the power is turned on (in other words, the time information output from the real-time clock RTC95). When a certain period of time has elapsed since the time has passed (in other words, when a certain period of time has elapsed based on the time information output from the real-time clock RTC95), the current state of the setting suggestion effect is displayed (currently (in other words, the time information output from the real-time clock RTC95). Based on this, when a certain period of time has elapsed, this can be used as an opportunity to end the change in the state of the setting suggestion performance.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 41(B), (E), and (H), based on the time information, 10:00, 10:20, The transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed at the first specific time of 10:40, and then, based on the time information, in the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. 41(K), The display of the current state of the setting suggestion performance (display of the current setting suggestion performance state) can be ended at a second specific time of 10:45. In the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance, for example, in the time period from 10:00 to 10:45, the current state of the setting suggestion performance (current setting The suggested performance state) can be clearly shown to the player by being displayed in the state display area JH. In addition, in the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 43(B) to 43(J), the transition process (see FIG. Then, in the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 43(J), the transition process (state transition process shown in FIG. It is now possible to end the display of the current setting suggestion performance state (display of the current setting suggestion performance state) that has been transitioned by the state transition process). In the state change performance Q of the setting suggestion performance, in the time period from 18:00 to 22:00, the current state of the setting suggestion performance (current setting suggestion performance The status) can be clearly shown to the player by being displayed in the status display area JH. According to this configuration, based on the time information that specifies the elapsed time since the power is turned on (in other words, the time information output from the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock), the transition process to the first specific time (see FIG. 23) is performed. (state transition processing), and thereafter, the display of the current setting suggestion performance state (display of the current setting suggestion performance state) can be finished at a second specific time based on the time information. In other words, based on the time information output from the real-time clock RTC 95, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed at the first specific time, and at the second specific time. Since it is possible to end the display of the current setting suggestion performance state (display of the current setting suggestion performance state), the state of the setting suggestion performance can be changed in conjunction with the time information output from the real-time clock RTC95. It is possible to perform control to cause the change to occur, and it can also be used as a trigger for ending a change in the state of the setting suggestion performance.

[Modified example]
Below, modified examples of the state change effects P to Q of the setting suggestion effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, and the state change performance Q of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. The transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) for transitioning to the second state where the setting suggestion effect can be an advantageous effect for the player compared to the current state is performed using time information that specifies the elapsed time from power on (in other words, This can be executed based on the time information output from the real-time clock RTC95. However, in addition to time information, calendar information may also be output from the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock. In other words, the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock, may further include calendar information. In this way, when the predetermined number of days elapsed since introduction based on the calendar information is reached, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed. Furthermore, on a specific date, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed based on time information output from the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock. Furthermore, when a predetermined number of days have elapsed since the installation in a hall (gaming hall) based on calendar information, a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) may be executed. The "day when the machine was installed in the hall (gaming hall) based on the calendar information" may be the date when it was actually installed in the hall (gaming hall), or the day when the machine was installed in the hall (gaming hall) based on the calendar information. It is also possible to set the date based on the day when the system will be installed at the venue.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, and the state change performance Q of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. A transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) for transitioning to a second state where the setting suggestion effect can be an advantageous effect for the player compared to the current state is performed using time information that specifies the elapsed time from power-on (in other words, This can be executed based on the time information output from the real-time clock (RTC95). However, in addition to time information, day of the week information may also be output from the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock. In other words, the real-time clock RTC 95 may further include day of the week information. In this way, when a specific day of the week is reached based on the day of the week information, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed. As a specific day of the week, for example, on Friday, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed based on time information output from the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock. The event can be held on the gaming machine 1 on an event day called ``Day (in other words, ○○ day)''. As a result, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed at the event, making it easier for players to determine the setting information, and changing the setting information to the hall (gaming hall) according to the event. This can also be the timing at which the side (store manager or administrator) changes the setting information (in other words, the setting information can be changed to match the event).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the state change effect P of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 41(B), (E), (H), (L) and FIGS. In the state change performance Q of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 43(B), (E), and (H), the state display image of the setting suggestion performance was displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the content of the status display image of the setting suggestion effect may be played as audio from the speaker 67. For example, when it is the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, the content of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1 setting normal", so this "state 1 setting normal" is played from the speaker 67. Good too. In this way, the change in the state of the setting suggestion performance (transition result) can be communicated to the player by voice.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. (Notification) When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect that can be displayed is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed after that, except for the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy". The screen 7a gradually becomes transparent and disappears, and the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" decreases in size toward the status display area JH formed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the robot finally moves to the status display area JH, a character image "Status 2" is displayed in the status display area JH. However, as the state of the setting suggestion performance, a state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion performance is displayed that intentionally suggests (notifies) the player that the state is ``state 2'' even though it is actually ``state 3.'' After that, the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a, except for the character image "Condition 2 Setting High Accuracy", and the message "Condition 2 Setting High Accuracy" is displayed on the screen 7a. When the character image moves toward the status display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image moves to the status display area JH formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. A character image "Status 3" may be displayed on the screen. By doing this, since the transition result of the state change may not be confirmed until it is displayed in the state display area JH, the transition of the state change will not be confirmed at the stage when the state display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. First, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that makes it appear as if a further state change transition occurred after the character image moved. Note that this can also be applied to the state change effect Q of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance in FIGS. 41(K) and 42(U), and the state change performance Q of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. 43(J), the setting suggestion performance is When the status display ends, this is used as an opportunity to initialize the status of the setting suggestion performance to "status 1". However, instead of setting it to "state 1", the state of the setting suggestion performance immediately before the state display of the setting suggestion performance ends may be stepped down by one step. For example, when the state of the setting suggestion performance immediately before the state display of the setting suggestion performance ends is "state 3", it may be set to "state 2" which is one step down from "state 3". Note that when the state of the setting suggestion performance immediately before the state display of the setting suggestion performance ends is "state 1", the state becomes "state 1".

[Modification 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 provided on the game board 2 is displayed in the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 and the state change performance Q of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. The state of the setting suggestion effect (one of "state 1" to "state 4") was displayed in the state display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed in the lower right corner of . However, instead of the image display device 7, the state of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed in the display area of another image display device provided on the game board 2, or the status of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed on a sub display device provided in the door frame 53. The state of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed on the screen. Other image display devices provided on the game board 2 may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, a dot matrix, or other image display device. For example, when a decorative member is fixed to the center decorative body 10 at the lower right of the image display device 7, the image display device is provided at the center of this decorative member. Further, the sub-display device includes a right sub-display device, a left sub-display device, and an upper sub-display device. The right sub-display device is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display device is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display device is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display device and the left sub-display device are arranged at paired positions with the game board 2 interposed therebetween. The upper sub-display device is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display device, the left sub-display device, and the upper sub-display device are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub display device may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The state of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on one of the right sub display device, left sub display device, and upper sub display device that constitute the sub display device. In addition, as another image display device provided on the game board 2, when a decorative member is fixed to the center decoration body 10, a predetermined image may be printed in advance instead of the image display device provided on the center decoration body 10. The display device may include a printing member and a built-in backlight (a plurality of light emitting means) arranged behind the printing member. Thereby, a predetermined image can be displayed by causing the built-in backlight (light emitting means) to emit light. A plurality of printing members having predetermined images printed thereon may be provided so that the predetermined images corresponding to the emitted light colors of the built-in backlight (light emitting means) are respectively displayed. In this case, the predetermined images printed on the plurality of printing members are different images. In this way, the emitted light color of the built-in backlight (light emitting means) can be changed to, for example, red (first light emitting means), green (second light emitting means), blue (third light emitting means), white (fourth light emitting means), etc. When the built-in backlight (first light emitting means) emits red light, a predetermined image printed on the first printing member with red light emission (the first predetermined image "State 1"") is displayed, and when the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) emits green light, a predetermined image printed on the second printing member with green light emission ("state 2" which is the second predetermined image) is displayed. ) is displayed and the built-in backlight (third light emitting means) emits blue light, a predetermined image printed on the third printing member with blue light emission (“state 3” which is the third predetermined image) is displayed, and when the built-in backlight (fourth light emitting means) emits white light, a predetermined image (“state 4” which is the fourth predetermined image) printed on the fourth printing member with white light emission is displayed. Is displayed. In this way, by emitting light from the built-in backlight, the state of the setting suggestion effect (any state among "state 1" to "state 4") can be displayed as a predetermined image. Of course, when the built-in backlight is off, the predetermined image is not displayed, so the current state of the setting suggestion effect (any state from "state 1" to "state 4") becomes hidden.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the time information specifying the elapsed time since the power was turned on can be executed based on the time information output from the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock. However, it is also possible to measure the elapsed time from when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1 by counting up the number of interrupt timer processes executed at a regular time without using the RTC 95, which is a real-time clock (for example, The number of 2 millisecond interrupt timer processing is counted up by the interrupt timer every 2 milliseconds). Even with this configuration, time information can be acquired because the elapsed time from power-on can be accurately measured in real time.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the state change performance P of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 and the state change performance Q of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. 43 may not include some of the described effects. However, other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect 6-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a drawing with a drawing probability according to the setting information when drawing a drawing when a game ball enters,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that makes suggestions based on the setting information,
having a plurality of setting suggestion presentation states in which settings regarding the setting suggestion presentation are different from each other;
The setting suggestion performance is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states,
It has time information that specifies the elapsed time since the power was turned on,
A transition process for transitioning from a first state of the setting suggestion performance states to a second state in which the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player compared to the first state can be executed based on the time information. be,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 6-1,
executing the transition process when a specific time is reached based on the time information;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 6-1 or aspect 6-2,
Furthermore, it has calendar information,
Executing the transition process when a predetermined number of days has elapsed since the introduction based on the calendar information is reached;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 6-1 to 6-3,
Furthermore, it has day of the week information,
executing the transition process when a specific day of the week is reached based on the day of the week information;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 6-1 to 6-4,
When a certain period of time has elapsed since the transition process was executed based on the time information, the display of the current setting suggestion presentation state is ended;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 6-1 to 6-5,
executing the transition process at a first specific time based on the time information, and then ending the display of the current setting suggestion presentation state at a second specific time based on the time information;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The state change effects R to S of the setting suggestion effect will be explained below using FIGS. 44 to 46. In FIGS. 44 to 46, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings. FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining the state change production R of the setting suggestion production, FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the continuation of the state change production R of the setting suggestion production in FIG. 44, and FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the state change production R of the setting suggestion production. It is a diagram for explaining a state change performance S of the performance.

As mentioned above, the state change performance of this setting suggestion performance is based on the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion performance and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance ( The states of the setting suggestion performance that are associated with (reliability rate) are defined as four states, state 1 to state 4, and are stepped up one by one toward state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4. The state of the setting suggestion effect changes by jumping up or jumping up (for example, jumping up from state 1 to state 3), creating a new game experience in which the player aims for state 4. It is intended to give. Of course, as mentioned above, the states of the setting suggestion effect include stepping up or jumping up one by one from state 1, state 2, state 3, and then to state 4, as well as one by one. It may also step down or jump down (for example, jump down from state 3 to state 1).

The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a state change effect of the setting suggestion effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

Here, first, the state change performance R of the setting suggestion performance and the state change performance S of the setting suggestion performance will be explained in order. The state change performance R of the setting suggestion performance and the state change performance S of the setting suggestion performance are performed based on the pressing operation of the performance button 63.

The state change performance R of the setting suggestion performance is performed when the player is able to operate the performance button 63 at the timing clearly indicated on the display screen 7a when the performance button 63 is pressed. On the other hand, the state change performance S of the setting suggestion performance occurs when the player is able to press the performance button 63 at a predetermined timing without the timing of the pressing operation of the performance button 63 being clearly indicated on the display screen 7a. It is different in that it is performed based on what is called a "successful press operation of the back button." It should be noted that when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the production button 63 has a white light emitting mode, and when the production button 63 is pressed, it has a white flashing light emission mode.

[Status change performance R of setting suggestion performance]
The state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect will be explained with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. First, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the statically displayed performance symbols move slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode. Later on (in other words, after the stop display of the performance design is released and the performance design is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), the speed gradually increases from low speed toward the bottom and changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state. The display mode changes to a transparent state and changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the performance pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production design decelerates just before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). . When the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, they move gradually and slowly in the vertical direction.

To briefly explain the fluctuation icon and the hold icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 44(A), they correspond to the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which are currently changing as the expiry of the first special figure hold. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second special figure reservation is provided. A second hold display area is provided as a second hold display area. In the first hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Ad. In the second hold display area, although not shown, hold icons 9B can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be displayed. It is now possible to stock up. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that when the player is playing a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is While the 4th hold display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the 1st hold display position 9Bd to the 4th hold display position 9Bd of the hold icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the left-handed When playing a game, a hold icon 9B exists and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). Furthermore, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is played. 4. The hold display position 9Ad is not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the hold icon 9A exists when playing the right-handed game and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the hold icon 9A is completed). Then, the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd of the hold icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

After turning on the power of the game machine 1, the player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. When it moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 44(A). Along with this, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and a state where only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested remains. becomes.

After that, during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 44(B), the status display of the setting suggestion effect is started, and the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a ( Furthermore, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all pending icons 9A, and the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are hidden from the display screen 7a (display screen 7a). ). Along with this, a production button image BG (an image imitating the production button 63 or an image imitating the old version of the production button 63) corresponding to the production button 63 is displayed slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. ) is displayed above the production button image BG, near the top of the display screen 7a, a message image MS1 saying "Press at the right time!" is displayed, and below the production button image BG a character is displayed. A timing bar TB having a horizontally long rectangular shape indicating the elapse of time is displayed on the display screen 7a as the coin-shaped character icon CI moves from the right-hand side start position to the left-hand end position. Below the timing bar TB, near the bottom of the display screen 7a, there is a fastest position image T1 having a triangular shape indicating the timing of pressing the production button 63 and indicating immediately after the start, and an intermediate having a triangular shape indicating the middle. The position image T2 and the latest position image T3 having a triangular shape indicating just before the end are displayed in a line. Note that the center of the production button image BG and the center of the triangular intermediate position image T2 are arranged on a vertical line connecting the midpoint of the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side of the display screen 7a. Further, since the production button 63 is in a state where it is lit in white, the production button image BG is also in a display mode in which it is lit in white in conjunction with this. A performance in which the performance button image BG (message image MS1 is also included when the message image MS1 is displayed on the display screen 7a) is displayed on the display screen 7a is referred to as a performance button operation promotion performance (hereinafter the same). Further, when the message image MS1, which is a text image saying "Press at the right time!", is displayed on the display screen 7a, a voice saying "Press at the right time", which is the content of this text image, is played from the speaker 67. It has become. Thereby, pressing operation of the production button 63 can also be prompted by voice.

The character icon CI starts moving from the right start position to the left end position at a predetermined speed (which may be a constant speed or may repeat acceleration and deceleration), and reaches the point indicated by the fastest position image T1. Although the player presses the performance button 63 at the same timing, the pressing operation is delayed a little and the timing is shifted, so that " A message image MS2 "Failure" is displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that when the production button 63 is pressed, it blinks in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation on the production button 63 was unsuccessful, it blinks in blue as a failure light emission mode. In conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also takes on a display mode in which it flashes in blue. Thereafter, the effect button 63 again changes to the light emitting mode in which it lights up in white, and in conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also returns to the display mode in which it lights up in white.

The character icon CI passes the point indicated by the fastest position image T1, continues moving toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (which may be a constant speed, or may repeat acceleration and deceleration), and then moves to the intermediate position. The player presses the production button 63 aiming at the timing when the point indicated by the position image T2 is reached, and this time, as the timing of this pressing operation matches, the production button is pressed as shown in FIG. 44(D). A message image MS3 "Success" is displayed on the display screen 7a at the upper left of the image BG. Note that when the production button 63 is pressed, it blinks in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation on the production button 63 was successful, it blinks in green as a successful light emission mode. In conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also changes to a display mode in which it flashes in green. Thereafter, the effect button 63 again changes to the light emitting mode in which it lights up in white, and in conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also returns to the display mode in which it lights up in white.

Further, when the message image MS3 "Success" is displayed on the display screen 7a at the upper left of the production button image BG, "Status 1" is displayed at the upper right of the production button image BG as the state of the setting suggestion production. ” is displayed (appears) in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape. The status display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect is divided into upper and lower parts, with text information "Status 1" in the upper row and text images "Settings normal" in the lower row, respectively. It is located.

A state 1 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 1 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, and "state 1" is placed in front of this state 1 display background image. and a text image that says ``Settings Normal'' are arranged. The background image for displaying state 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character images "state 1" and "setting normal." As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to be seen through the state 1 display background image. Note that the background image for displaying state 1 may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character images "state 1" and "setting normal." In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

The character icon CI passes the point indicated by the intermediate position image T2 and continues to move toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (which may be a constant speed or may repeat acceleration and deceleration), and then As shown in 44(E), when a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. The screen 7a gradually becomes transparent and disappears. By displaying the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect on the display screen 7a for this predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1". Staying in "state 1" can be clearly indicated to the player.

In the state where this "state 1" remains, the frequency (incidence rate) of the setting suggestion performance associated with "state 1" in the fluctuation after the end of the relevant fluctuation (that is, the next fluctuation) The setting suggestion performance will be performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

The character icon CI passes the point indicated by the intermediate position image T2, continues moving toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (may be a constant speed, or may repeat acceleration/deceleration), and reaches the final position. The player presses the production button 63 aiming at the timing when the point indicated by the late position image T3 is reached, and this time, as the timing of this pressing operation matches, the production is performed as shown in FIG. 44(F). A message image MS3 "Success" is displayed on the display screen 7a at the upper left of the button image BG. Note that when the production button 63 is pressed, it blinks in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation on the production button 63 was successful, it blinks in green as a successful light emission mode. In conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also takes on a display mode in which it blinks in green. Thereafter, the effect button 63 again changes to the light emitting mode in which it lights up in white, and in conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also returns to the display mode in which it lights up in white.

Further, in the upper right corner of the effect button image BG, a setting suggestion effect state display image JM2 that can suggest (inform) the player that the setting suggestion effect is in "state 2" is in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape. is displayed (appears) with The status display image JM2 of this setting suggestion effect is divided into upper and lower parts, with text information "Status 2" in the upper row and text images "Settings Highly Accurate" in the lower row. It is located in The state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect has the same configuration as the state display image JM1 of the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 2 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 2 is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. On the front side of this background image for displaying state 2, a text image that reads "state 2 setting high accuracy" is arranged. The background image for displaying state 2 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy".

The character icon CI passes the point indicated by the latest position image T3 and continues moving toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (which may be a constant speed or may repeat acceleration and deceleration). When a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds) has passed since the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect gradually becomes transparent from the display screen 7a. It disappears. By displaying the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect on the display screen 7a for this predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2". Staying in "state 2" can be clearly indicated to the player.

In the state where this "state 2" remains, the frequency (incidence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" in the fluctuation after the end of the relevant fluctuation (that is, the next fluctuation) The setting suggestion performance will be performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect disappears from the display screen 7a, the left effect pattern 8L during a variable effect (variable display), the middle effect pattern 8C during a variable effect (variable display), and the middle effect pattern 8C during a variable effect (variable display). The right effect pattern 8R of (middle) is displayed again on the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all pending icons 9A, and the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are displayed on the display screen 7a. will be displayed again.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 44(G), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "2", and when the symbols with the same number do not line up, it is then stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol starts. be done. As a result, there is no stock of pending icons 9A that have not been consumed.

After that, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed multiple times. By confirming the loss, there will be a series of losses instead of successes.

Thereafter, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 44(H). Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. , and only two pending icons 9A remain in stock without being consumed.

After that, during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 44(I), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and furthermore, the variation The icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the pending icons 9A, and the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a). Along with this, a production button image BG (an image imitating the production button 63 or an image imitating the old version of the production button 63) corresponding to the production button 63 is displayed slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. ) is displayed again, and the message image MS1 "Press at the right time!" is displayed again above the production button image BG, near the top of the display screen 7a, and below the production button image BG, A character icon CI having a coin shape with a character formed thereon moves from a right side start position to a left side end position, and a timing bar TB having a horizontally long rectangular shape indicating the passage of time is displayed again on the display screen 7a. Here, below the timing bar TB and near the bottom of the display screen 7a, a triangular-shaped latest position image T3 indicating the pressing operation timing of the production button 63 and indicating just before the end is displayed. Further, since the production button 63 is in a state where it is lit in white, the production button image BG is also in a display mode in which it is lit in white in conjunction with this. Further, when the message image MS1, which is a text image saying "Press at the right time!", is displayed on the display screen 7a, a voice saying "Press at the right time", which is the content of this text image, is played from the speaker 67. It has become. Thereby, pressing operation of the production button 63 can also be prompted by voice.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44(J), the character icon CI moves from the right start position to the left end position at a predetermined speed (which may be a constant speed or may be accelerated or decelerated repeatedly). Start.

After that, the player presses the production button 63 aiming at the timing when the character icon CI reaches the point indicated by the latest position image T3, and as the timing of this press operation matches, the screen shown in FIG. 44(K) As shown, a message image MS3 "Success" is displayed on the display screen 7a at the upper left of the performance button image BG. Note that when the production button 63 is pressed, it blinks in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation on the production button 63 was successful, it blinks in green as a successful light emission mode. In conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also changes to a display mode in which it flashes in green. Thereafter, the effect button 63 again changes to the light emitting mode in which it lights up in white, and in conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also returns to the display mode in which it lights up in white.

Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the effect button image BG, a setting suggestion effect state display image JM3 that can suggest (inform) the player that the setting suggestion effect is in "state 3" is in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape. is displayed (appears) with The status display image JM3 of this setting suggestion effect is divided into upper and lower parts, with character information "Status 3" in the upper row and character images "Settings high confidence" in the lower row. It is located in The setting suggestion performance status display image JM3 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion performance status display image JM1 described above and the setting suggestion performance status display image JM2 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 3 display background image (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of this background image for displaying state 3, a character image reading "state 3 setting high confidence" is placed. The background image for displaying state 3 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 3 setting high confidence".

The character icon CI passes the point indicated by the latest position image T3 and continues moving toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (which may be a constant speed or may repeat acceleration and deceleration). When a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect gradually becomes transparent from the display screen 7a. It disappears. By displaying the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect on the display screen 7a for this predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3". Staying in "state 3" can be clearly indicated to the player.

In the state where this "state 3" remains, the frequency (incidence rate) of the setting suggestion performance associated with "state 3" in the fluctuation after the end of the relevant fluctuation (that is, the next fluctuation) The setting suggestion performance will be performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, in FIG. 44(D), a state display image JM1 of a setting suggestion performance that can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 1" is displayed, and then, In FIG. 44(F), a state display image JM2 of a setting suggestion performance that can suggest (inform) the player that the setting suggestion performance is in "state 2" is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. In (K), a state display image JM3 of a setting suggestion performance that can suggest (inform) the player that the setting suggestion performance is in "state 3" is displayed, and "state 1" → The state suggestion (notification) of the setting suggestion performance is suggested (informed) to the player by stepping up one by one without stepping down or jumping down in the order of "state 2" → "state 3". As a result, since the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion performance that was displayed last suggests (informs) the player that it is in "state 3", the change after the change ends (i.e. In the change from the next variation), the setting suggestion effect is performed based on the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect. Become.

Here, the setting suggestion shown in FIG. 25(B) is established because the transition is in the order of "state 1" → "state 2" → "state 3" and it is determined that the state is "state 3" or higher. In the performance pattern table, setting performance pattern 12 (setting information: settings 4, 5, 6) among setting performance patterns 8 to 13 is determined as the setting suggestion performance pattern. Therefore, in this embodiment, since the setting information has been narrowed down to settings 4, 5, and 6, the state of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the display screen 7a. The state of the performance is initialized to "state 1".

When the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect disappears from the display screen 7a, the left effect pattern 8L during a variable effect (variable display), the middle effect pattern 8C during a variable effect (variable display), and the middle effect pattern 8C during a variable effect (variable display). The right effect pattern 8R of (middle) is displayed again on the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all pending icons 9A, and the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are displayed on the display screen 7a. will be displayed again.

After that, in this variation, as shown in FIG. 44(L), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "6", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "7", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol starts. be done. Along with this, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and a state where only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested remains. becomes.

After that, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is stopped and displayed multiple times. By confirming the loss, there will be a series of losses instead of successes.

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (plays a game called left-handed hitting), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When it moves and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 45(M). Along with this, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and a state where only one hold icon 9A is stocked without being digested remains. becomes.

After that, during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 45(N), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and furthermore, the variation The icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the pending icons 9A, and the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a). Along with this, a production button image BG (an image imitating the production button 63 or an image imitating the old version of the production button 63) corresponding to the production button 63 is displayed slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. ) is displayed above the production button image BG, near the top of the display screen 7a, the message image MS1 saying "Press at the right time!" is displayed again, and below the production button image BG, the character The coin-shaped character icon CI moves from the right-hand start position to the left-hand end position, and a timing bar TB having a horizontally long rectangular shape indicating the passage of time is displayed again on the display screen 7a. Here, below the timing bar TB and near the bottom of the display screen 7a, there is a fastest position image T1 having a triangular shape indicating immediately after the start, indicating the timing of the pressing operation of the production button 63, and a triangular shape indicating the middle. The intermediate position images T2 having the following values are displayed in a line. Note that the center of the production button image BG and the center of the triangular intermediate position image T2 are arranged on a vertical line connecting the midpoint of the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side of the display screen 7a. Further, since the production button 63 is in a state where it is lit in white, the production button image BG is also in a display mode in which it is lit in white in conjunction with this. Further, when the message image MS1, which is a text image saying "Press at the right time!", is displayed on the display screen 7a, a voice saying "Press at the right time", which is the content of this text image, is played from the speaker 67. It has become. Thereby, pressing operation of the production button 63 can also be prompted by voice.

The character icon CI starts moving from the right start position to the left end position at a predetermined speed (which may be a constant speed or may repeat acceleration and deceleration), and reaches the point indicated by the fastest position image T1. The player presses the production button 63 at the same timing, and as the timing of this press operation matches, a message "Success" is displayed at the upper left of the production button image BG, as shown in FIG. 45(O). Image MS3 is displayed on display screen 7a. Note that when the production button 63 is pressed, it blinks in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation on the production button 63 was successful, it blinks in green as a successful light emission mode. In conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also takes on a display mode in which it blinks in green. Thereafter, the effect button 63 again changes to the light emitting mode in which it lights up in white, and in conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also returns to the display mode in which it lights up in white.

Here, unlike FIGS. 44(D), (F), and (K), when the message image MS3 "success" is displayed on the display screen 7a at the upper left of the production button image BG, the production button At the upper right of the image BG, a status display image of the setting suggestion performance that can suggest (inform) the player the state of the setting suggestion performance is not displayed (does not appear) on the display screen 7a.

This is because, in FIG. 44(D), the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance that can suggest (notify) the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 1" is already displayed. Next, in FIG. 44(F), a state display image JM2 of a setting suggestion performance that can suggest (notify) the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 2" is displayed, and then In FIG. 44(K), a state display image JM3 of a setting suggestion performance that can suggest (notify) the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is "State 3" is displayed. The state suggestion (notification) of the setting suggestion performance is suggested (notified) to the player by stepping up one by one without stepping down or jumping down in the order of ``1'' → ``state 2'' → ``state 3''. This is because it is determined that the state is "state 3" or higher. As a result, in FIG. 45(O), the state of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

In other words, since it has been determined that the status is "state 3" or higher, the candidates for the setting information have been narrowed down. In other words, in FIG. 44(K), once the setting information candidates have already been narrowed down, this is used as an opportunity to finish displaying the state of the setting suggestion effect, so in FIG. 45(O), the state of the setting suggestion effect is It is arranged not to be displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the setting suggestion shown in FIG. 25(B) is established because the transition is in the order of "state 1" → "state 2" → "state 3" and it is determined that the state is "state 3" or higher. In the performance pattern table, setting performance pattern 12 (setting information: settings 4, 5, 6) among setting performance patterns 8 to 13 is determined as the setting suggestion performance pattern. By this confirmation, as mentioned above, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1", but here, setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: setting 4, 5 , 6), the setting suggestion performance will be performed until the number of times of fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol (number of times of lottery) reaches a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 times). When the state of the setting suggestion effect is reached, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1", and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. A setting suggestion performance will be performed.

Note that in this embodiment, the predetermined number of times is set in advance to 15 times. When playing a game by renting one game ball for 4 yen, it is possible to shoot 250 game balls into the game area 3 for 1000 yen. Approximately 100 game balls can be launched toward the game area 3 per minute. Assuming that approximately 15 balls enter the first starting port 20 for 1000 yen, by continuing the game for 1000 yen, setting performance pattern 12 (setting information: Setting suggestion effects will be performed based on settings 4, 5, and 6). As a result, even if the player finishes displaying the status of the setting suggestion effect, the player can still receive information based on the setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: settings 4, 5, 6) in which the setting information candidates have been narrowed down by 1000 yen. You can check the reliability of the setting suggestion effect that was performed, and even if you have to leave the gaming machine 1 and end the game for some reason, you can continue playing for 1000 yen. Later, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1", and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. Even if a setting suggestion effect is performed and another player starts playing, the setting information candidates are actually narrowed down, but it is difficult to determine the setting information of gaming machine 1 at the time of starting. It can be done.

The character icon CI passes the point indicated by the fastest position image T1 and moves toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (which may be a constant speed or by repeating acceleration and deceleration) as shown in FIG. 45(P). ), and as shown in FIG. 45(Q), the player presses the production button 63 aiming at the timing when the point indicated by the intermediate position image T2 is reached, and this press operation is performed again this time. As the timings match, a message image MS3 "Success" is displayed on the display screen 7a at the upper left of the performance button image BG. Note that when the production button 63 is pressed, it blinks in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation on the production button 63 was successful, it blinks in green as a successful light emission mode. In conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also takes on a display mode in which it blinks in green. Thereafter, the effect button 63 again changes to the light emitting mode in which it lights up in white, and in conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also returns to the display mode in which it lights up in white.

Also here, unlike in FIGS. 44(D), (F), and (K), when the message image MS3 "success" is displayed on the display screen 7a at the upper left of the production button image BG, the production button A status display image of the setting suggestion performance that can suggest (inform) the player the state of the setting suggestion performance is not displayed (does not appear) in the upper right of the image BG on the display screen 7a.

This is because, in FIG. 44(D), the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance that can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is “state 1” is already displayed; Next, in FIG. 44(F), a state display image JM2 of a setting suggestion performance that can suggest (notify) the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 2" is displayed, and then , in FIG. 44(K), a state display image JM3 of a setting suggestion performance that can suggest (notify) the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 3" is displayed. The state suggestion (notification) of the setting suggestion performance is suggested (notified) to the player by stepping up one by one without stepping down or jumping down in the order of "1" → "state 2" → "state 3". This is because it is determined that the state is "state 3" or higher. As a result, in FIG. 45(O), the state of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

In other words, since it is determined that the status is "state 3" or higher, the candidates for the setting information have been narrowed down. In other words, in FIG. 44(K), since the status display of the setting suggestion effect has already been completed after the setting information candidates have been narrowed down, the state of the setting suggestion effect is also displayed in FIG. 45(Q). It is arranged not to be displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, it is determined that the state is "state 3" or higher due to the transition in the order of "state 1" → "state 2" → "state 3", and as described above, the state shown in FIG. In the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in , it has been determined that setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: settings 4, 5, 6) among setting effect patterns 8 to 13 is the setting suggestion effect pattern. There is. By this confirmation, as described above, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1", but here, setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: setting 4, 5 , 6), the setting suggestion performance will be performed until the number of times of fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol (number of times of lottery) reaches a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 times). When the state of the setting suggestion effect is reached, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1", and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. A setting suggestion performance will be performed.

The character icon CI passes the point indicated by the intermediate position image T2 and continues to move toward the left end position at a predetermined speed (which may be a constant speed or may repeat acceleration and deceleration), and then 45(R), the point indicated by the latest position image T3 is reached. After that, the left performance symbol 8L during the fluctuation performance (variation display), the middle performance symbol 8C during the fluctuation performance (variation display), and the right performance symbol 8R during the fluctuation performance (variation display) are displayed again on the display screen 7a. Further, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all pending icons 9A, and the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 45(S), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "4", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "8", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 45(T), the effect is A variation effect (variation display) of the symbols is started. As a result, there is no stock of pending icons 9A that have not been consumed.

After that, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned to the same numerical pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, When the right performance symbols 8R are aligned with the symbols of the same number and are stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed, and thereafter a winning game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

In the state change production R of the setting suggestion production, a character icon CI having a coin shape with a character shaped moves from the right start position to the left end position below the timing bar TB having a horizontally long rectangular shape indicating the passage of time. , any one position image, any two position images, or all positions among the fastest position image T1, intermediate position image T2, and slowest position image T3, which suggest the timing of the pressing operation of the production button 63. When the image is displayed, the character icon CI starts moving from the right side start position to the left side end position at a predetermined speed, and the player presses the production button 63 at the timing clearly indicated on the display screen 7a. When the performance button 63 is pressed and the timing of this pressing operation matches, a status display image of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, in the state change production R of the setting suggestion production, when the production button 63 is pressed at a specific timing (at the timing of the pressing operation of the production button 63), the state display image of the setting suggestion production is displayed on the display screen 7a. This makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player that the setting suggestion effect will remain in the state.

In addition, in the state change performance R of the setting suggestion performance, when the status display of the setting suggestion performance is started, in FIG. A status display image JM1 of a setting suggestion performance that can be performed (notification) is displayed, and then in FIG. ) is displayed, and then, in FIG. 44(K), the player is suggested (notified) that "state 3" is the state of the setting suggestion performance. The state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect that can be performed is displayed, and the settings can be set by stepping up one by one in the order of "state 1" → "state 2" → "state 3" without stepping down or jumping down. By suggesting (notifying) the state of the suggestive performance to the player, when it is determined that the state is "state 3" or higher and the candidates for setting information are narrowed down, this will be used as an opportunity to suggest the setting. The state display of the effect is ended, and in FIGS. 45(O) and (Q), the state of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, in the state change production R of the setting suggestion production, when the production button 63 is pressed at a specific timing (depending on the timing of the depression operation of the production button 63), candidates for setting information are narrowed down, and this is used as a trigger. As a result, the status display of the setting suggestion effect is terminated.

In addition, in the state change performance R of the setting suggestion performance, the status display images of each setting suggestion performance in FIGS. 44(C), (D), (F), (K) and FIGS. 45(O), (Q) are It is not displayed or displayed based on what is determined in the state transition process shown in FIG. 23.

[Status change performance S of setting suggestion performance]
Next, the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 46. First, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the statically displayed performance symbols move slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode. Later on (in other words, after the stop display of the performance design is released and the performance design is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), the speed gradually increases from low speed toward the bottom and changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state. The display mode changes to a transparent state and changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the performance pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production design decelerates just before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). . When the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, they move gradually and slowly in the vertical direction.

To briefly explain the fluctuating icons and hold icons, for example, as shown in FIG. 46(A), they correspond to the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the expiry of the first special figure hold. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second special figure reservation is provided. A second hold display area is provided as a second hold display area. In the first hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Ad. In the second hold display area, although not shown, hold icons 9B can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be displayed. It is now possible to stock up. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a so-called left-handed game), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is The 4 hold display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, while the 1st hold display position 9Bd to the 4th hold display position 9Bd of the hold icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the left-handed When playing a game, a hold icon 9B exists and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). In addition, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is played. 4. The hold display position 9Ad is hidden on the display screen 7a (of course, when playing the game of right-hand hitting, the hold icon 9A exists and is displayed on the display screen 7a until it is completed). Then, the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd of the hold icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

After turning on the power of the game machine 1, the player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. When it moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 46(A). Along with this, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and a state where only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested remains. becomes.

After that, during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "7", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "7", and then the middle effect is displayed. The symbol 8C is in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued, and the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are aligned to the same number symbol (here, the number "7") to form a reach.

After that, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and furthermore, the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, all pending icons 9A, When the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad to 9Ad are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), a battle effect is started as shown in FIG. 46(C).

When the battle performance starts, the ally character CRA appears from the upper right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the lower left side of the display screen 7a as an opponent of the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a. CRA and enemy character CRB fight. Since the battle performance can suggest to the player that the expectation of winning is higher than when the battle performance has not started, the player has a high interest in the battle performance. When the ally character CRA wins in the battle performance, it becomes a win, and thereafter a winning game is started in which the player is given a profit. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle performance, it will be a loss.

When this battle effect is started and the player presses the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing without any image or sound prompting the user to press the effect button 63 during the battle effect, the player presses the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing. When the status display of the setting suggestion performance starts with "Success", the status display image of the setting suggestion performance is displayed, and when the setting information candidates are narrowed down, the status display of the setting suggestion performance ends and the setting suggestion performance starts. The status display image disappears.

The battle performance is started, and the ally character CRA appears from the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB appears from the lower left side of the display screen 7a as an opponent of the ally character CRA, and they mutually move toward the center of the display screen 7a. , the player presses the production button 63 aiming at the timing when the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB hold their swords in the center of the display screen 7a, and as the timing of this press operation coincides, the screen shown in FIG. 46(D) is pressed. ), a message image MS3 "Success" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. Note that when the production button 63 is pressed, it blinks in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation on the production button 63 was successful, it blinks in green as a successful light emission mode. Thereafter, the effect button 63 becomes a light emitting mode in which it lights up white again.

Furthermore, when the message image MS3 "success" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, "state 1" is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a as the state of the setting suggestion effect. A status display image JM1 of a setting suggestion performance that can suggest (notify) a certain fact to the player is displayed (appears) in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape. The status display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect is divided into upper and lower parts, with text information "Status 1" in the upper row and text images "Settings normal" in the lower row, respectively. It is located.

A state 1 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 1 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, and "state 1" is placed in front of this state 1 display background image. and a text image that says "Settings Normal" are arranged. The background image for displaying state 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character images "state 1" and "setting normal." As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a that corresponds to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 1 display background image. Note that the background image for displaying state 1 may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character images "state 1" and "setting normal." In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46(E), the friendly character CRA moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the upper left side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the lower right side of the display screen 7a. When a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect was displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect gradually changes from the display screen 7a. It becomes transparent and disappears. By displaying the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect on the display screen 7a for this predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1". Staying in "state 1" can be clearly indicated to the player.

In the state in which this "state 1" remains, the frequency (incidence rate) of the setting suggestion performance associated with "state 1" will be The setting suggestion performance will be performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

After that, the friendly character CRA moves from the upper left side of the display screen 7a toward the center of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB moves from the lower right side of the display screen 7a toward the center of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRA moves from the lower right side of the display screen 7a toward the center of the display screen 7a. 46 (F ), a message image MS3 "Success" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. Note that when the production button 63 is pressed, it blinks in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation on the production button 63 was successful, it blinks in green as a successful light emission mode. Thereafter, the effect button 63 becomes a light emitting mode in which it lights up white again.

Further, when the message image MS3 "Success" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, "state 3" is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a as the state of the setting suggestion effect. A status display image JM3 of a setting suggestion performance that can suggest (notify) a certain fact to the player is displayed (appears) in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape. The status display image JM3 of this setting suggestion effect is divided into upper and lower parts, with character information "Status 3" in the upper row and character images "Settings high confidence" in the lower row. It is located in The state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect has the same configuration as the state display image JM1 of the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 3 display background image (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect. In front of this background image for displaying state 3, a character image reading "state 3 setting high confidence" is placed. The background image for displaying state 3 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 3 setting high confidence".

After that, as shown in FIG. 46(G), the friendly character CRA moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Then, when a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds) has passed since the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect gradually becomes transparent from the display screen 7a. It disappears. By displaying the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect on the display screen 7a for this predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 3". Staying in "state 3" can be clearly indicated to the player.

In the state where this "state 3" remains, the frequency (incidence rate) of the setting suggestion performance associated with "state 3" in the fluctuation after the end of the relevant fluctuation (that is, the next fluctuation) The setting suggestion performance will be performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance.

In FIG. 46(D), a state display image JM1 of a setting suggestion performance that can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 1" is displayed, and then, In FIG. 46(F), a state display image JM3 of a setting suggestion performance that can suggest (notify) the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 3" is displayed, and "state 1" is displayed. ” → “State 3”, the game jumps up without stepping down or jumping down to suggest (notify) the state of the setting suggestion performance to the player. As a result, since the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion performance that was last displayed suggests (informs) the player that it is in "state 3" at this moment, the fluctuation after the fluctuation ends (i.e. In the change from the next variation), the setting suggestion effect is performed based on the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect. Become.

Here, since it is determined that the state is "state 3" or higher due to the transition in the order of "state 1" → "state 3", in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), It has been determined that the setting presentation pattern 13 (setting information: settings 5, 6) among the setting presentation patterns 8 to 13 is set as the setting suggestion presentation pattern. Therefore, in this embodiment, since the setting information has been narrowed down to settings 5 and 6, the state of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the setting suggestion effect status is not displayed on the display screen 7a. Initialize the state to "state 1".

After that, the friendly character CRA moves from the upper right side of the display screen 7a toward the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB moves from the lower left side of the display screen 7a toward the center of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB moves from the lower left side of the display screen 7a toward the center of the display screen 7a. The player presses the effect button 63 at the time when the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are holding their swords again in the center, but this time the pressing operation is delayed a little and the timing is off, resulting in the As shown in 46(H), a message image MS2 indicating "Failure" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. Note that when the production button 63 is pressed, it blinks in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation on the production button 63 was unsuccessful, it blinks in blue as a failure light emission mode. Thereafter, the effect button 63 becomes a light emitting mode in which it lights up white again.

Here, when a message image MS2 indicating "failure" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, the state of the setting suggestion effect is indicated to the player on the upper right side of the display screen 7a ( The status display image of the setting suggestion performance that can be performed (notification) is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46(I), the friendly character CRA moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the upper left side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Moving.

After that, the friendly character CRA moves from the upper left side of the display screen 7a toward the center of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB moves from the lower right side of the display screen 7a toward the center of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRA moves from the lower right side of the display screen 7a toward the center of the display screen 7a. 46 (J ), a message image MS3 "Success" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. Note that when the production button 63 is pressed, it blinks in white as a light emission mode, but here, since the press operation on the production button 63 was successful, it blinks in green as a successful light emission mode. Thereafter, the effect button 63 becomes a light emitting mode in which it lights up white again.

Here, unlike FIGS. 46(D) and (F), when the message image MS3 "success" is displayed on the display screen 7a at the upper left of the production button image BG, the upper right corner of the display screen 7a In addition, the status display image of the setting suggestion performance that can suggest (inform) the player the state of the setting suggestion performance is not displayed (does not appear) on the display screen 7a.

This is because, in FIG. 46(D), the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance that can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 1" is already displayed. Next, in FIG. 46(F), a state display image JM3 of a setting suggestion performance that can suggest (inform) the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 3" is displayed, By jumping up without stepping down or jumping down in the order of "state 1" → "state 3" and suggesting (notifying) the state suggestion (notification) of the setting suggestion effect to the player, "state 3" This is because it has been confirmed that the above is the case. As a result, in FIG. 46(J), the state of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

In other words, since it has been determined that the status is "state 3" or higher, the candidates for the setting information have been narrowed down. In other words, in FIG. 46(F), once the setting information candidates have been narrowed down, this is used as an opportunity to finish displaying the state of the setting suggestion effect, so in FIG. 46(J), the state of the setting suggestion effect is It is arranged not to be displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, since it is determined that the state is higher than "state 3" by transitioning in the order of "state 1" → "state 3", in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), It has been determined that the setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: settings 5, 6) among the setting effect patterns 8 to 13 is set as the setting suggestion effect pattern. By this confirmation, as mentioned above, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1", but here, setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: setting 5, 6 ), the setting suggestion performance will be performed until the number of times (number of drawings) of fluctuating representations (fluctuating displays) of the performance symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 times), and the predetermined number of times is reached. Then, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1", and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. A suggestive performance will be performed.

Note that in this embodiment, the predetermined number of times is set in advance to 15 times. When playing a game by renting one game ball for 4 yen, it is possible to shoot 250 game balls into the game area 3 for 1000 yen. Approximately 100 game balls can be launched toward the game area 3 per minute. Assuming that approximately 15 balls enter the first starting port 20 for 1000 yen, by continuing the game for 1000 yen, setting performance pattern 13 (setting information: Setting suggestion effects will be performed based on settings 5 and 6). As a result, even if the player finishes displaying the status of the setting suggestion effect, the player can continue playing based on the setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: settings 5 and 6) in which the setting information candidates have been narrowed down by 1000 yen. You can check the reliability of the setting suggestion effect, and even if you have to leave the gaming machine 1 for some reason and end the game, you can continue playing for 1000 yen and then continue playing. The state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1", and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting suggestion is made based on any one of setting effect patterns 1 to 7. Even if a performance is to be performed and another player starts playing, the setting information of the gaming machine 1 is difficult to determine at the time of starting, although the setting information candidates have actually been narrowed down. be able to.

After that, in the battle performance, when the friendly character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the middle performance symbol 8C is displayed temporarily stopped, and the middle performance symbol 8C is displayed temporarily stopped. The right effect symbol 8R is displayed again on the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all pending icons 9A, and the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. Is displayed.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 46(K), the middle production pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "8", and the symbols with the same number (here, the number "7") are not aligned, and then , the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

As described above, in FIG. 46(D), the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance that can suggest (notify) the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 1" is displayed. Then, in FIG. 46(F), a status display image JM2 of a setting suggestion performance that can suggest (notify) the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 3" is displayed. Then, the state suggestion (notification) of the setting suggestion performance is suggested (notified) to the player by jumping up from "state 1" to "state 3". As a result, since the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion performance that was displayed last suggests (informs) the player that it is in "state 3", the change after the change ends (i.e. In the change from the next variation), the setting suggestion effect is performed based on the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 3" and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion effect. Become. Here, as mentioned above, since it is determined that the state is "state 3" or higher due to the transition in the order of "state 1" → "state 3", the setting suggestion shown in FIG. 25(B) In the effect pattern table, it is determined that the setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: settings 5, 6) among the setting effect patterns 8 to 13 is the setting suggestion effect pattern. By this confirmation, as mentioned above, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1", but here, setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: setting 5, 6 ), the setting suggestion performance will be performed until the number of times (number of drawings) of fluctuating representations (fluctuating displays) of the performance symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 times), and the predetermined number of times is reached. Then, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1", and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. A suggestive performance will be performed.

After that, in order to start the next variation, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. 46(L), the effect is A variation effect (variation display) of the symbols is started. As a result, there is no stock of pending icons 9A that have not been consumed.

After that, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned to the same numerical pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, When the right performance symbols 8R align with the symbols of the same number and are stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed, and thereafter a winning game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

In the state change performance S of the setting suggestion performance, a battle performance is started, and when the player presses the performance button 63 at a predetermined timing in a state where there is no image or sound that prompts the pressing operation of the performance button 63 during the battle performance. , the player presses the performance button 63 aiming at the so-called "successful press operation of the back button", that is, the timing when the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB hold their swords in the center of the display screen 7a, and this press operation is performed. As the timings of 2 and 2 coincide with each other, a status display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, in the state change production S of the setting suggestion production, by pressing the production button 63 at a specific timing (aiming at the timing when the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB hold their swords in the center of the display screen 7a) When the performance button 63 is pressed), a state display image of the setting suggestion performance is displayed on the display screen 7a, making it possible to clearly indicate to the player that the setting suggestion performance will remain in the state.

In addition, in the state change performance S of the setting suggestion performance, when the state display of the setting suggestion performance is started, in FIG. A state display image JM1 of a setting suggestion performance that can be performed (notification) is displayed, and then in FIG. ) is displayed, and the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion performance that can be performed is displayed, and the state suggestion of the setting suggestion performance ( When it is determined that the status is 3 or higher and the setting information candidates are narrowed down by suggesting (notifying) the player that the setting information is set (notification), this will be used as an opportunity to end the status display of the setting suggestion performance. However, in FIG. 46(J), the state of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, in the state change production S of the setting suggestion production, by pressing the production button 63 at a specific timing (aiming at the timing when the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB hold their swords in the center of the display screen 7a) When the setting information candidates are narrowed down (by pressing the effect button 63), this is used as an opportunity to terminate the status display of the setting suggestion effect.

In the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect, the state display images of each setting suggestion effect in FIGS. It may or may not be displayed based on the information.

[Effect example]
Below, examples of effects of the state change effects R to S of the setting suggestion effects are shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change performance R of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, and the state change performance S of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. At the time of a lottery ("winning" or "losing" lottery) associated with the ball entering the 20th ball, the setting information is referred to and the lottery is performed with a lottery probability according to the setting information. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance (the setting suggestion performance determination process in FIG. 24) that makes suggestions based on setting information, and has a plurality of setting suggestion performance states in which the settings related to the setting suggestion performance are different from each other. It is designed to be executed based on one of the setting suggested presentation states. It has a performance button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player. When the production button 63 (operation means) is pressed (operated) at a specific timing, the setting suggestion production can become an advantageous production for the player from the first state of the setting suggestion production states compared to the first state. It is now possible to execute a transition process to transition to the second state (state transition process in FIG. 23). As the specific timing, for example, the fastest position image T1 in FIG. 44(C), the intermediate position image T2 in FIG. 44(D), the slowest position image T3 in FIGS. 44(F) and (K), and FIG. 46(D) , (F), and (H), there is a timing when the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB hold their swords in the center of the display screen 7a, and at this specific timing, the production button 63 (operation means) is pressed (operated). ), by executing the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23), for example, in FIG. 44(F), a transition is made from "state 1 setting normal" to "state 2 setting high", and in FIG. 44(k ), there is a transition from "state 2 setting high confidence" to "state 3 setting high confidence", and in FIG. 46(F) there is a transition from "state 1 setting normal" to "state 3 setting high confidence". According to this configuration, the transition process of transitioning from the first state of the setting suggestion presentation states to the second state where the setting suggestion presentation can be an advantageous presentation for the player compared to the first state is performed using the presentation button 63 (operation). When the means) is pressed (operated) at a specific timing, it can be executed, so in addition to informing the player of the winning or losing results of the lottery, It is possible to provide the player with a new game experience in which the player plays the game and aims to transition from the first state to the second state. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change production R of the setting suggestion production shown in FIGS. 44(B) to 44(F), the variation production (variation display ) starts, there are three specific timings in the fluctuation: the fastest position image T1, the intermediate position image T2, and the slowest position image T3, and these specific timings are the "winning" results of the lottery. , there are multiple cases before a "loss" is announced. According to this configuration, when the production button 63 (operation means) is pressed (operated) at a specific timing, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed. The state of the setting suggestion performance can be controlled by an input operation of pressing the performance button 63 (operation means).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change production R of the setting suggestion production shown in FIGS. An image BG (operation means image) is displayed, and a performance button operation promotion performance (operation performance) using the performance button 63 (operation means) can be executed. In the performance button operation promotion performance (operation performance) in FIGS. 44(B) to (F), the performance button 63 (operation means) is pressed at specific timings of the fastest position image T1, intermediate position image T2, and slowest position image T3. When operated (operated), a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed, and the effect button 63 ( When the operating means) is pressed (operated) at a specific timing of the latest position image T3, a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed. According to this configuration, the performance button image BG (operation means image) corresponding to the performance button 63 (operation means) is displayed, and the performance button operation promotion performance (operation performance) using the performance button 63 (operation means) is executed. This allows the player to be prompted to press (operate) the performance button 63 (operation means).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change production S of the setting suggestion production shown in FIGS. 46(C) to (J), the production button image BG (operation means image) corresponding to the production button 63 (operation means) is It is possible to execute a battle performance (specific performance) using the performance button 63 (operating means) without being displayed. In the battle effects (specific effects) in FIGS. 46(D), (F), and (H), the effect button 63 (operation means) is pressed at the timing when the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB hold their swords at the center of the display screen 7a. When a pressing operation (operation) is performed at a specific timing, a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed. According to this configuration, when performing a battle performance (specific performance) using the performance button 63 (operation means) without displaying the performance button image BG (operation means image) corresponding to the performance button 63 (operation means), When the player presses (operates) the production button 63 (operation means) at the timing when the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB hold their swords in the center of the display screen 7a, a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed. Since this can be executed, it is possible to perform control to change the state of the setting suggestion performance in response to a so-called "successful press operation of the back button" during a battle performance (specific performance).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change performance R of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 45(O) and (Q), the current setting suggestion is It is now possible to end the display of the performance state (display of the current setting suggestion performance state). In FIGS. 45(O) and (Q), in FIG. 44(K), steps are already taken one by one in the order of "state 1" → "state 2" → "state 3" without stepping down or jumping down. The state suggestion (notification) of the setting suggestion performance is suggested (notified) to the player, and it is confirmed that the state is "state 3" or higher. In this embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 25(B) is established because the state is determined to be "state 3" or higher by transitioning in the order of "state 1" → "state 2" → "state 3". In the setting suggestion effect pattern table, setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: settings 4, 5, 6) among setting effect patterns 8 to 13 has been determined as the setting suggestion effect pattern. In addition, in the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. It is now possible to use this as an opportunity to end the process. In FIG. 46(J), the state suggestion (notification) of the setting suggestion effect is already performed in FIG. 46(F) by jumping up without stepping down or jumping down in the order of "state 1" → "state 3". It has been confirmed that the condition is ``Status 3'' or higher because of the suggestion (notification) made to the person concerned. In this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. In the above, it is determined that the setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: settings 5, 6) among the setting effect patterns 8 to 13 is set as the setting suggestion effect pattern. According to this configuration, when the setting information candidates have been narrowed down by the setting suggestion presentation that has transitioned so far, the display of the current setting suggestion presentation state (display of the current setting suggestion presentation state) is ended and the setting information is set. This can be the end of the change in the state of the suggestive performance.

[Modified example]
Below, modified examples of the state change effects R to S of the setting suggestion effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 45(O) and (Q), in FIG. ”, it is determined that the status is “state 3” or higher, and therefore, in the setting suggestion presentation pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting presentation patterns 8 to 8 are set as setting suggestion presentation patterns. Of the setting effect patterns 13, it has been determined that it is the setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: settings 4, 5, 6). In addition, in the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 46(J), the state has already been changed from "state 1" to "state 3" in the order of "state 1" to "state 3" in FIG. 46(F). is determined, in the setting suggestion presentation pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting presentation pattern 13 (setting information: setting 5, 6). However, instead of this, the display of the current setting suggestion performance state (display of the current setting suggestion performance state) ends at the timing when the possibility of the setting information being the first specific setting information is eliminated due to the setting suggestion performance. You may also do so. For example, in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), when setting effect pattern 7 to setting effect pattern 9 out of setting effect pattern 8 to setting effect pattern 13 are executed as the setting suggestion effect pattern, Setting information: Setting 1 will be denied. In this way, by setting the setting information: setting 1 as the first specific setting information, the setting information will become the current setting suggestion when the possibility of the first specific setting information disappears due to the setting suggestion effect. The display of the performance state (display of the current setting suggestion performance state) can be ended.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 45(O) and (Q), in FIG. ”, it is determined that the status is “state 3” or higher, and therefore, in the setting suggestion presentation pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting presentation patterns 8 to 8 are set as setting suggestion presentation patterns. Of the setting effect patterns 13, it has been determined that it is the setting effect pattern 12 (setting information: settings 4, 5, 6). In addition, in the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 46(J), the state has already been changed from "state 1" to "state 3" in the order of "state 1" to "state 3" in FIG. 46(F). is determined, in the setting suggestion presentation pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting presentation pattern 13 (setting information: setting 5, 6). However, instead of this, the display of the current setting suggestion effect state (display of the current setting suggestion effect state) ends at the timing when the setting information is determined to be the second specific setting information by the setting suggestion effect. You may also do so. For example, in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), when setting effect patterns 10 and 13 are executed among setting effect patterns 8 to 13 as setting suggestion effect patterns, setting information: When the setting becomes 6 and the setting effect patterns 11 and 13 are executed, the setting information becomes setting 5. In this way, by setting a single setting information: setting 6 or setting information: setting 5 as the second specific setting information, the setting information is shown to be the second specific setting information by the setting suggestion effect. The display of the current state of the setting suggestion performance (display of the current setting suggestion performance state) can be ended at the timing when the setting suggestion performance is determined.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the state change production R of the setting suggestion production shown in FIGS. 44(D), (F), and (K), and the state change production S of the setting suggestion production shown in FIGS. , a status display image of the setting suggestion effect was displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the content of the status display image of the setting suggestion effect may be played as audio from the speaker 67. For example, when it is the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, the content of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1 setting normal", so this "state 1 setting normal" is played from the speaker 67. Good too. In this way, the change in the state of the setting suggestion performance (transition result) can be communicated to the player by voice.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the state change effects R of the setting suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 44(C), (D), (F), (K) and FIGS. ), (F), (H), and (J) in the state change effects S of the setting suggestion effects, a message image MS2 indicating "failure" or a message image MS3 indicating "success" was displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, sounds such as "failure" and "success", which are the contents of message images MS2 and MS3, may be played from the speaker 67. In this way, the result of pressing the performance button 63 can be conveyed to the player also by voice.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change performance R of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 44 and 45 and the state change performance S of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. 46, candidates for setting information are narrowed down by the setting suggestion performance. Taking this as an opportunity, the state of the setting suggestion performance was initialized to "state 1". However, instead of setting it to "state 1", the state of the setting suggestion performance immediately before the state display of the setting suggestion performance ends may be stepped down by one step. For example, when the state of the setting suggestion performance immediately before the state display of the setting suggestion performance ends is "state 3", it may be set to "state 2" which is one step down from "state 3".

[Modification 6]
In the state change production R of the setting suggestion production shown in FIGS. 44 and 45 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the setting information candidates are narrowed down, the setting production pattern 12 (setting information: Based on settings 4, 5, and 6), the setting suggestion effect will be performed until the number of fluctuating effects (fluctuating displays) of the effect design (the number of times of drawing) reaches a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, , 15 times), the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1", and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), among setting effect patterns 1 to 7, A setting suggestion performance was performed based on either of these. In addition, in the state change production S of the setting suggestion production shown in FIG. 46, when the setting information candidates are narrowed down, the production symbol is The setting suggestion effect will be performed until the number of fluctuating effects (fluctuating displays) (the number of drawings) reaches a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 times), and when the predetermined number of times is reached, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes. was initialized to become "state 1", and in the setting suggestion presentation pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), the setting suggestion presentation was performed based on any one of setting presentation patterns 1 to 7. . However, when the setting information candidates are narrowed down, the state of the setting suggestion effect is initialized to "state 1" instead of the setting effect pattern 13 (setting information: settings 5, 6) where the setting information candidates were narrowed down. In the corresponding setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), the setting suggestion effect may be performed based on any one of setting effect patterns 1 to 7. The player knows that the candidates for setting information have already been narrowed down, and when the candidates for setting information have been narrowed down, for some reason he is forced to leave the gaming machine 1 and end the game. Even if the setting suggestion effect is initialized and the setting suggestion effect is performed according to the setting effect pattern corresponding to "state 1", other players may not start playing. Even if this happens, it may be difficult to determine the setting information of the gaming machine 1 at the starting point, although the setting information candidates are actually narrowed down.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the specific timing includes, for example, the fastest position image T1 in FIG. 44(C), the intermediate position image T2 in FIG. 44(D), and the slowest position image T2 in FIGS. There is a timing when the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB hold their swords at the center of the display screen 7a in the position image T3 and FIGS. 46(D), (F), and (H), and the production button 63 is pressed at this specific timing. When the (operating means) is pressed (operated), a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) is executed, and for example, in FIG. ", and in FIG. 44(K), the transition is from "state 2 setting high certainty" to "state 3 setting high confidence", and in FIG. 46(F), the transition is from "state 1 setting normal" to "state 3 setting high". It had transitioned to "Belief". In other words, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, there are a plurality of specific timings. However, a specific timing may exist among a plurality of timings. Specifically, for example, multiple tings such as the fastest position image T1 in FIG. 44(C), the intermediate position image T2 in FIG. 44(D), and the slowest position image T3 in FIGS. 44(F) and (K) There are timings (that is, the fastest position image T1, intermediate position image T2, and slowest position image T3), and any one of them is set to a specific timing (for example, the latest position image T3 is a specific timing). , when the production button 63 (operation means) is pressed (operated) at this specific timing, a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) may be executed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the state change effect R of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 44 and 45 and the state change effect S of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 46 may not include some of the effects described. However, other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect 7-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a drawing with a drawing probability according to the setting information when drawing a drawing when a game ball enters,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that makes suggestions based on the setting information,
having a plurality of setting suggestion presentation states in which settings regarding the setting suggestion presentation are different from each other;
The setting suggestion performance is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states,
It has an operation means that can be operated by a player,
When the operating means is operated at a specific timing, a transition is made from a first state of the setting suggestion presentation states to a second state in which the setting suggestion presentation can be an advantageous presentation for the player compared to the first state. It is possible to execute transition processing to
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 7-1,
There are multiple specific timings before the lottery result is announced.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 7-1 or aspect 7-2,
An operating means image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and an operation effect using the operating means can be performed,
executing the transition process when the operation means is operated at the specific timing in the operation performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 7-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect 7-1 or aspect 7-2,
an operation means image corresponding to the operation means is not displayed and it is possible to execute a specific performance using the operation means;
executing the transition process when the operating means is operated at the specific timing in the specific performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 7-1 to 7-4,
terminating the display of the current setting suggestion presentation state when the setting information candidates have been narrowed down by the setting suggestion presentation;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 7-1 to 7-5,
terminating the display of the current setting suggestion presentation state at a timing when the setting information has no possibility of being the first specific setting information due to the setting suggestion presentation;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 7-1 to 7-5,
terminating the display of the current setting suggestion presentation state at a timing when it is determined by the setting suggestion presentation that the setting information is second specific setting information;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The state change productions T to V of the setting suggestion production will be explained below using FIGS. 47 to 49. In FIGS. 47 to 49, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the state change production T of the setting suggestion production, FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the state change production U of the setting suggestion production, and FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the state change production of the setting suggestion production. It is a figure for explaining V.

As mentioned above, the state change performance of this setting suggestion performance is based on the frequency (occurrence rate) of the setting suggestion performance and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance ( The states of the setting suggestion performance that are associated with (reliability rate) are defined as four states, state 1 to state 4, and the state is stepped up one by one toward state 1, state 2, state 3, and state 4. The state of the setting suggestion effect changes by jumping up or jumping up (for example, jumping up from state 1 to state 3), creating a new game experience in which the player aims for state 4. It is intended to give. Of course, the states of the setting suggestion effect include, as mentioned above, in addition to stepping up or jumping up one by one from state 1, state 2, state 3, and then towards state 4. It may also step down or jump down (for example, jump down from state 3 to state 1).

The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a state change effect of the setting suggestion effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

Here, first, the state change performance T of the setting suggestion performance, the state change performance U of the setting suggestion performance, and the state change performance V of the setting suggestion performance will be explained in order.

[Status change performance T of setting suggestion performance]
The state change effect T of the setting suggestion effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 47. First, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the statically displayed performance symbols move slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode. Later on (in other words, after the static display of the performance design is released and the performance design is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), the speed gradually increases from low speed toward the bottom and changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state. The display mode changes to a transparent state and changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the performance pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production design decelerates just before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). . When the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, they move gradually and slowly in the vertical direction.

To briefly explain the fluctuating icons and hold icons, for example, as shown in FIG. 47(A), they correspond to the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the expiry of the first special figure hold. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second special figure reservation is provided. A second hold display area is provided as a second hold display area. In the first hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Ad. In the second hold display area, although not shown, hold icons 9B can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be displayed. It is now possible to stock up. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that when the player is playing a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is While the 4th hold display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the 1st hold display position 9Bd to the 4th hold display position 9Bd of the hold icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the left-handed When playing a game, a hold icon 9B exists and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). Furthermore, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is played. 4. The hold display position 9Ad is not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the hold icon 9A exists when playing the right-handed game and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the hold icon 9A is completed). Then, the first to fourth pending display positions 9Bd to 9Bd of the pending icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

The gaming machine 1 is in a state of waiting for a customer (waiting for a player), and a waiting screen (a demo screen for waiting for a customer, and also includes a screen on which performance symbols are displayed in a stopped state) is displayed on the display screen 7a. Sometimes, a player seats at the front of the gaming machine 1 and starts a game, and the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and the game ball enters the first starting port 20. 47 (A ), a fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed.

After that, there are successive losses without winning, and as shown in FIG. 47(B), when the game starts from the standby screen and 20 minutes of playing time has elapsed, this is used as an opportunity to set the setting suggestion performance state. A status display image JM1 of a setting suggestion effect that can suggest (inform) the player that the player is in “status 1” has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a ( Appear). The status display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 1 Setting Normal" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance is arranged on the near side of the variation area of the left production pattern 8L, the variation area of the middle production pattern 8C, and the variation area of the right production pattern 8R. As a result, although the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect overlaps with a part of the area on the right side of the fluctuation area of the left effect pattern 8L in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is the left effect. It is not obstructed by the symbol 8L and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is in a state where it straddles the fluctuation area of the medium effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction. Although it overlaps with the fluctuation area in the front and back direction, the setting suggestion effect status display image JM1 is not obstructed by the middle effect pattern 8C and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape of the setting suggestion effect status display image JM1 is similar to the right effect. Although it overlaps with a part of the left side of the variation area of the symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance is not obstructed by the right performance symbol 8R and is not difficult to see.

A state 1 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 1 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, and "state 1 settings" is placed in front of this state 1 display background image. An image of the text "Normal" is placed. The background image for displaying state 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1 setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a that corresponds to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 1 display background image. Note that the background image for displaying state 1 may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal." In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

When the setting suggestion performance status display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the setting suggestion performance status display image JM1 gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a. By displaying the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", which means that the game stays in "state 1". It is now possible to make it clear to the person.

In the state where this "state 1" remains, the frequency (incidence rate) of the setting suggestion performance associated with "state 1" in the fluctuation after the end of the relevant fluctuation (that is, the next fluctuation) The setting suggestion performance will be performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

After that, in this variation, as shown in FIG. 47(C), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "2", and when the symbols with the same number do not line up, it is then stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol starts. be done. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, the pending icon 9A is not consumed and there is no stocked item at all.

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and there are successive losses without winning, and after that, the game ball is displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad. When the pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and there are only two hold icons 9A that are not digested and are stocked. .

Thereafter, in this variation, as shown in FIG. 47(D), when the game is started from the standby screen and the playing time has elapsed for 40 minutes, this is used as an opportunity to change the state of the setting suggestion performance to "state 1". A status display image JM1 of a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting (notifying) a certain fact to the player is again displayed (appears) having a horizontally long rectangular shape on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a.

When the setting suggestion performance status display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the setting suggestion performance status display image JM1 gradually becomes transparent from the display screen 7a and disappears again. By displaying the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", which means that the game stays in "state 1". It is now possible to make it clear to the person.

In the state where this "state 1" remains, the frequency (incidence rate) of the setting suggestion performance associated with "state 1" in the fluctuation after the end of the relevant fluctuation (that is, the next fluctuation) The setting suggestion performance will be performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

After that, in this variation, as shown in FIG. 47(E), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "6", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then the number is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol starts. be done. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed.

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and there are successive losses without winning, and after that, the game ball is displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad. When the pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only three pending icons 9A remain in stock without being consumed.

Thereafter, in this variation, as shown in FIG. 47(F), when the game is started from the standby screen and 60 minutes have elapsed, this is used as an opportunity to change the state of the setting suggestion performance to "state 2". A status display image JM2 of a setting suggestion performance that can suggest (inform) a player about a certain fact has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM2 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect has the same configuration as the state display image JM1 of the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 2 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 2 is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. On the front side of this background image for displaying state 2, a text image that reads "state 2 setting high accuracy" is arranged. The background image for displaying state 2 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy".

When the setting suggestion performance status display image JM2 is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the setting suggestion performance status display image JM2 gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a. By displaying the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2", which means that the game stays in "state 2". It is now possible to make it clear to the person.

In the state where this "state 2" remains, the frequency (incidence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" in the fluctuation after the end of the relevant fluctuation (that is, the next fluctuation) The setting suggestion performance will be performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 47(G), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "4", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "8", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol starts. be done. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and there are only two hold icons 9A that are not digested and are stocked. .

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and there are successive losses without winning, and after that, the game ball is displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad. When the pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed.

Thereafter, in this variation, as shown in FIG. 47(H), when the game is started from the standby screen and 80 minutes have elapsed, this is used as an opportunity to change the state of the setting suggestion performance to "state 2". A status display image JM2 of a setting suggestion performance capable of suggesting (notifying) a certain fact to the player is again displayed (appears) in a horizontally long rectangular shape on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a.

When the setting suggestion performance status display image JM2 is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the setting suggestion performance status display image JM2 gradually becomes transparent from the display screen 7a and disappears again. By displaying the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 2", which means that the game stays in "state 2". It is now possible to make it clear to the person.

In the state where this "state 2" remains, the frequency (incidence rate) of the setting suggestion effect associated with "state 2" in the fluctuation after the end of the relevant fluctuation (that is, the next fluctuation) The setting suggestion performance will be performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

After that, in this variation, as shown in FIG. 47(I), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "4", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then the number is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol starts. be done. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is not digested and is not stocked at all.

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 (a so-called left-handed game), and there are successive losses without winning, and then the left production symbol 8L becomes the number "7". The middle effect symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "0", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the player leaves the gaming machine 1 with the loss confirmed. After that, a standby screen appears as shown in FIG. 47(J). The standby screen is a demonstration screen for waiting for customers, and also includes a screen on which performance symbols are stopped and displayed. By entering this standby screen, the state of the setting suggestion performance, which has so far increased from "state 1" to "state 2", will be reset and return to "state 1".

When the gaming machine 1 is in a state of waiting for a customer (waiting for a player) and the standby screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, a player sits in front of the gaming machine 1 and starts playing a game. plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), and two game balls happen to enter the first starting port 20 in succession, and the game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the first holding display position. When the pending icon 9A displayed at 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect symbols is started as shown in FIG. 47(K). When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed.

After that, there are successive losses without winning, and as shown in FIG. 47(L), when the game is started from the standby screen and 20 minutes have elapsed, this is used as an opportunity to set the setting suggestion performance state. A status display image JM1 of a setting suggestion effect that can suggest (inform) the player that the player is in “status 1” has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a ( Appear).

When the setting suggestion performance status display image JM1 is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the setting suggestion performance status display image JM1 gradually becomes transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a. By displaying the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1", which means that the game stays in "state 1". It is now possible to make it clear to the person.

In the state where this "state 1" remains, the frequency (incidence rate) of the setting suggestion performance associated with "state 1" in the fluctuation after the end of the relevant fluctuation (that is, the next fluctuation) The setting suggestion performance will be performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

After that, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned to the same numerical pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, When the right performance symbols 8R are aligned with the symbols of the same number and are stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed, and thereafter a winning game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

In the state change performance T of the setting suggestion performance, the gaming machine 1 is in a state of waiting for a customer (waiting for a player), and the display screen 7a is a waiting screen (a demo screen for waiting for a customer, and the performance symbols are stopped and displayed). (including the screen) is displayed, when the player sits on the front of the gaming machine 1 and starts playing the game, and the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20, ( When playing a so-called left-handed game), the game time is measured and the game is displayed for 20 minutes, 40 minutes, 60 minutes, and 80 minutes from the standby screen.In other words, when you start the game, the status display image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed every 20 minutes. is displayed on the display screen 7a.

In addition, in the state change effect T of the setting suggestion effect, the state display images of each setting suggestion effect in FIGS. 47(B), (D), (F), (H), and (L) are the states shown in FIG. It is displayed on the display screen 7a based on what has been determined in the transition process.

In addition, in the state change performance T of the setting suggestion performance, the game time is measured and the setting suggestion performance changes for 20 minutes, 40 minutes, 60 minutes, and 80 minutes from the standby screen. The display image was to be displayed on the display screen 7a. However, instead of the playing time, we measure outs, which is the total number of balls that flow into the gaming area and enter the various winning holes, and the number of game balls that are collected at the out holes. The status display image of the setting suggestion performance may be displayed on the display screen 7a based on the out state. For example, each time the out reaches a value of "1995," "3995," or "5995," this may be used as an opportunity to display a status display image of the setting suggestion effect on the display screen 7a. Out is a value from 0 to 5999, and when it exceeds 5999, it is reset to 0.

[Status change effect U of setting suggestion effect]
Next, the state change effect U of the setting suggestion effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 48. First, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the statically displayed performance symbols move slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode. Later on (in other words, after the static display of the performance design is released and the performance design is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), the speed gradually increases from low speed toward the bottom and changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state. The display mode changes to a transparent state and changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the performance pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production design decelerates just before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). . When the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, they move gradually and slowly in the vertical direction.

To briefly explain the fluctuating icons and pending icons, for example, as shown in FIG. 48(A), they correspond to the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R that are currently changing as the expiry of the first special figure hold. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second special figure reservation is provided. A second hold display area is provided as a second hold display area. In the first hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Ad. In the second hold display area, although not shown, hold icons 9B can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be displayed. It is now possible to stock up. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that when the player is playing a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is While the 4th hold display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the 1st hold display position 9Bd to the 4th hold display position 9Bd of the hold icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the left-handed When playing a game, a hold icon 9B exists and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). Furthermore, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is played. 4. The hold display position 9Ad is not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the hold icon 9A exists when playing the right-handed game and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the hold icon 9A is completed). Then, the first to fourth pending display positions 9Bd to 9Bd of the pending icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

A player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), and two game balls happen to enter the first starting port 20 in a row, resulting in the first holding. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect symbols is started as shown in FIG. 48(A). When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed.

After that, in the variation, as shown in FIG. 48(B), a setting suggestion performance state display image JM1 that can suggest (notify) the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is "state 1". has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. The status display image JM1 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 1 Setting Normal" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. That is, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance is arranged on the near side of the variation area of the left production pattern 8L, the variation area of the middle production pattern 8C, and the variation area of the right production pattern 8R. As a result, although the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect overlaps with a part of the area on the right side of the fluctuation area of the left effect pattern 8L in the front-rear direction, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is the left effect. It is not obstructed by the symbol 8L and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is in a state where it straddles the fluctuation area of the medium effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction. Although it overlaps with the fluctuation area in the front and back direction, the setting suggestion effect status display image JM1 is not obstructed by the middle effect pattern 8C and is not difficult to see, and the horizontally long rectangular shape of the setting suggestion effect status display image JM1 is similar to the right effect. Although it overlaps with a part of the left side of the variation area of the symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion performance is not obstructed by the right performance symbol 8R and is not difficult to see.

A state 1 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 1 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, and "state 1 settings" is placed in front of this state 1 display background image. An image of the text "Normal" is placed. The background image for displaying state 1 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1 setting normal". As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a that corresponds to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 1 display background image. Note that the background image for displaying state 1 may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal." In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 1 display background image.

When the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears), and the status display area JH, which is displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a, is displayed. The character image "Normal" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and when it finally moves to the status display area JH, the character image "Status 1" appears in the status display area JH. is displayed. In other words, in the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal", the information "Status 1" is reflected as is, whereas the information "Setting Normal" is not reflected. By displaying "state 1" in the state display area JH, it is now possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1" and that the player is staying in "state 1". There is.

In the state where this "state 1" remains, the frequency (incidence rate) of the setting suggestion performance associated with "state 1" in the fluctuation after the end of the relevant fluctuation (that is, the next fluctuation) The setting suggestion performance will be performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

Although the status display area JH overlaps with the downstream side of the variation area of the right effect pattern 8R in the front-rear direction, the status display area JH is arranged at the frontmost side like the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, it is not obstructed by the right presentation pattern 8R and is not difficult to see. Further, a dedicated status display area background image (not shown) is arranged in the horizontally long rectangular inner area of the status display area JH. The background image for the status display area has a design and contrast set and is opaque in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1". This makes it difficult to see the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH through the status display area background image. Note that the background image for the status display area may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "Status 1". In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the status display area JH can be visually recognized through the status display area background image.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 48(C), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "2", and when the symbols with the same number do not line up, it is then stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol starts. be done. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, there is no stock of hold icons 9A that have not been digested.

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and there are successive losses without winning, and after that, the game ball is displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad. When the pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and there are only two hold icons 9A that are not digested and are stocked. .

Thereafter, in this variation, as shown in FIG. 48(D), a state display image JM2 of setting suggestion performance that can suggest (notify) the player that "state 2" is the state of setting suggestion performance. has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the state display area JH continues to display "state 1" on the display screen 7a. The state display image JM2 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect has the same configuration as the state display image JM1 of the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 2 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 2 is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect. On the front side of this background image for displaying state 2, a text image that reads "state 2 setting high accuracy" is arranged. The background image for displaying state 2 is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy".

When the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM2 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen, except for the character image "Condition 2 Setting High Accuracy". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears from 7a. At this time, the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When moving toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, the character image "Status 2" appears in the upper row of the status display area JH, and " The text image "Waiting for activation" is displayed in upper and lower rows. In other words, in the character image "Status 2 Setting High Accuracy", the information "State 2" is reflected as is, whereas the information "Setting High Accuracy" is switched to the information "Waiting for activation". There is.

Here, at present, the state of the setting suggestion effect does not change to "state 2" and remains in "state 1", but the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1". By displaying text images such as "State 2" and "Waiting for activation" in the status display area JH, the state of the setting suggestion effect can be changed to "State 2". It is now possible to notify the player that he has acquired the right to change.

In the state where this "state 1" remains, the frequency (incidence rate) of the setting suggestion performance associated with "state 1" in the fluctuation after the end of the relevant fluctuation (that is, the next fluctuation) The setting suggestion performance will be performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

After that, in this variation, as shown in FIG. 48(E), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "6", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then the number is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the status display area JH continues to display text images such as "Status 2" and "Waiting for activation" on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. A variation effect (variation display) of the symbols is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed. At this time, the status display area JH continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the text images "state 2" and "waiting for activation" are switched to the text images "state 1".

Thereafter, during the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 48(G), the message image MS1 is displayed (appears) in a horizontally long rectangular shape on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the status display area JH continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the text image "Status 1" is switched to the text image "Status 2" and "Waiting for activation".

This message image MS1 conveys a method for changing the state of the setting suggestion performance and activating it, since the player has already acquired the right to change the state of the setting suggestion performance from "state 1" to "state 2". This is an image, which includes a character image that says "activated by operating the performance button" and is placed at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. In other words, the message image MS1 is placed in front of the variable area of the left presentation pattern 8L, the medium presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R. As a result, although the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the message image MS1 overlaps a part of the area on the right side of the fluctuation area of the left effect pattern 8L in the front-rear direction, the message image MS1 is not obstructed by the left effect pattern 8L and does not become difficult to see. Furthermore, although the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the message image MS1 straddles the variable area of the medium effect pattern 8C in the left and right direction and overlaps the variable area of the medium effect pattern 8C in the front and back direction, the message image MS1 is in the medium effect. It is not obstructed by the symbol 8C and is not difficult to see, and although the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the message image MS1 overlaps a part of the left side of the fluctuation area of the right production symbol 8R in the front-rear direction, the message image MS1 is not obstructed by the right production symbol 8R. It will not be obstructed by the weather and will not be difficult to see.

A message image background image (not shown) is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the message image MS1, and a text image "activated by operating the production button" is arranged in front of this message image background image. There is. The background image for the message image is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the text image "activated by operating the production button." As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the message image MS1 is difficult to see through the message image background image. Note that the background image for the message image may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "activated by operating the effect button." In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the message image MS1 can be visually recognized through the message image background image. Further, when the message image MS1, which is a text image that reads "Activate by operating the production button", is displayed on the display screen 7a, a voice that is the content of this text image, "Activate by operating the production button", is heard from the speaker 67. It looks like this. Thereby, pressing operation of the production button 63 can also be prompted by voice.

After message image MS1 is displayed for a predetermined period (15 seconds in this embodiment), message image MS1 disappears from display screen 7a. After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 48(H), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "4", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then the number is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the status display area JH continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the text image "Status 2" in the upper row is switched to "Production button", and the text image "Waiting for activation" in the lower row is changed to "By operation". It has been switched to a text image that says "Activate." In addition, in the status display area JH, the text image "Status 1" → "State 2", the text image "Waiting for activation" → "Production button", and the text image "Activate by operation" are repeatedly displayed in this order. Ru.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol starts. be done. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, there is no stock of hold icons 9A that have not been digested.

After that, the player plays a game in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), and there are successive losses without winning, and after that, the game ball is displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad. When the pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and there are only two hold icons 9A that are not digested and are stocked. .

After that, in this variation, as shown in FIG. 48(I), a setting suggestion performance state display image JM3 that can suggest (notify) the player that "state 3" is the state of the setting suggestion performance. has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the state display area JH continues to display "state 2" and "waiting for activation" on the display screen 7a. The status display image JM3 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. The setting suggestion performance status display image JM3 has the same configuration as the setting suggestion performance status display image JM1 described above and the setting suggestion performance status display image JM2 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Note that a state 3 display background image (not shown) for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the setting suggestion effect state display image JM3. In front of this background image for displaying state 3, a character image reading "state 3 setting high confidence" is arranged. The background image for displaying state 3 has a design and contrast set and is opaque in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence".

When the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears from 7a. At this time, the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a moves to the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When moving toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, the character image "Status 3" appears in the upper row of the status display area JH, and " The text image "Waiting for activation" is displayed in upper and lower rows. In other words, in the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence", the information "Status 3" is reflected as is, whereas the information "Setting High Confidence" is switched to the information "Waiting for activation". There is.

Here, at this moment, although the player has already acquired the right to change the state of the setting suggestion performance to "state 2", the player has not pressed the performance button 63, so the state of the setting suggestion performance changes to "state 2". It remains in state 1. For this reason, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the setting suggestion effect is staying in "state 1", and the state display area JH shows "state 3" and "waiting for activation". By displaying the character image , it is possible to inform the player that he has acquired the right to change the state of the setting suggestion performance to "state 3."

In the state where this "state 1" remains, the frequency (incidence rate) of the setting suggestion performance associated with "state 1" in the fluctuation after the end of the relevant fluctuation (that is, the next fluctuation) The setting suggestion performance will be performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 48(J), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "4", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "8", and the symbols with the same number are not aligned, and then it is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the status display area JH continues to display text images such as "Status 3" and "Waiting for activation" on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. A variation effect (variation display) of the symbols is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed. At this time, the status display area JH continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the text images "state 3" and "waiting for activation" are switched to the text images "state 1".

After that, when the player presses the performance button 63 during the fluctuation, the effect of changing the state of the setting suggestion performance is activated, and as shown in FIG. 48(L), the effect corresponding to the performance button 63 is activated. The production button image BG (which may be an image imitating the production button 63 or an image imitating an older version of the production button 63) is displayed in a pressed state, and the production button image BG A message image MS2 titled "Activation" having an effect image on the left side of the message image MS2 is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the production button 63 is pressed, normally the light flashes in white as a light emitting mode, but here it flashes in green. In conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also changes to a display mode in which it flashes in green. Thereafter, the effect button 63 again changes to the light emitting mode in which it lights up in white, and in conjunction with this, the effect button image BG also returns to the display mode in which it lights up in white. At this time, the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the text image "Status 1" is switched to the text image "Status 3", thereby changing the state of the setting suggestion effect to "State 3". In order to notify the player that the change has been made and the effect has been activated, and to emphasize the content displayed in the status display area JH (here, "Status 3"), the status display area of the status display area JH. The background image switches to the change-activated background image. Thereby, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is in "state 3", that is, the stay in "state 3".

In the state where this "state 3" remains, the frequency (incidence rate) of the setting suggestion performance associated with "state 3" in the fluctuation after the end of the relevant fluctuation (that is, the next fluctuation) The setting suggestion performance will be performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 8 to 13.

Note that if the player does not press the production button 63, the above-mentioned message image MS1 is redisplayed (appears) in a horizontally long rectangular shape on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. ). Thereafter, when the message image MS1 is displayed for a predetermined period of time (15 seconds in this embodiment), the message image MS1 disappears from the display screen 7a. In the status display area JH, the text image "Status 1" → "Status 3", the text image "Waiting for activation" → "Production button", and the text image "Activate by operation" are repeatedly displayed in this order. becomes.

After that, in the fluctuation, although not shown, the left effect pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "7," the middle effect pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "0," and the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "2." will be displayed, confirming your loss. Accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol starts. be done. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, there is no stock of hold icons 9A that have not been digested.

After that, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned to the same numerical pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, When the right performance symbols 8R are aligned with the symbols of the same number and are stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed, and thereafter a winning game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

In the state change performance U of the setting suggestion performance, once the player acquires the right to change the state of the setting suggestion performance to “state 2”, the player can change the setting suggestion performance by pressing the performance button 63 at any timing. It is now possible to activate "state 2" by changing the state, and once you have acquired the right to change the state of the setting suggestion production to "state 3", you can press the production button 63 at any time. By doing so, it is possible to change the state of the setting suggestion performance and activate "state 3".

Note that in the state change effect U of the setting suggestion effect, the state display images of each setting suggestion effect in FIGS. It is displayed on the display screen 7a based on this.

[Status change performance V of setting suggestion performance]
Next, the state change effect V of the setting suggestion effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 49. First, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the statically displayed performance symbols move slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode. Later on (in other words, after the stop display of the performance design is released and the performance design is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), the speed gradually increases from low speed toward the bottom and changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state. The display mode changes to a transparent state and changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the performance pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. In addition, the production design decelerates just before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). . When the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, they move gradually and slowly in the vertical direction.

To briefly explain the fluctuating icons and hold icons, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(A), they correspond to the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which are currently changing as the expiry of the first special figure hold. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation, and in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second special figure reservation is provided. A second hold display area is provided as a second hold display area. In the first hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Ad. In the second hold display area, although not shown, hold icons 9B can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be displayed. It is now possible to stock up. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that when the player is playing a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (playing a game called left-handed hitting), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is While the 4th hold display position 9Ad is displayed on the display screen 7a, the 1st hold display position 9Bd to the 4th hold display position 9Bd of the hold icon 9B are not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the left-handed When playing a game, a hold icon 9B exists and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the game is completed). Furthermore, when the player is playing a game in which the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (playing a game called right-handed hitting), the first holding display position 9Ad to the first holding display position 9Ad of the holding icon 9A is played. 4. The hold display position 9Ad is not displayed on the display screen 7a (of course, the hold icon 9A exists when playing the right-handed game and is displayed on the display screen 7a until the hold icon 9A is completed). Then, the first to fourth pending display positions 9Bd to 9Bd of the pending icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the player plays a game in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (a so-called left-handed game), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd. When the variable icon 9C is reached, a normal background image (not shown) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 49(A), and a variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect pattern is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and there are only two hold icons 9A that are not digested and are stocked. .

In addition, a status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (has appeared), and a character image "Status 1" is displayed in the status display area JH. ing. This is a status display image of the setting suggestion effect that can suggest (notify) the player that the setting suggestion effect is "state 1" on the result screen that will be described later after the previous winning game has finished. This is because JM1 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed (appeared) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a.

Specifically, the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 1 Setting Normal" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. When the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen 7a except for the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal". It gradually becomes transparent and disappears. At this time, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears), and the status display area JH is displayed on the horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. When the text image "Normal" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the text, and finally moves to the status display area JH, the text image "Status 1" appears in the status display area JH. is displayed. In other words, in the character image "Status 1 Setting Normal", the information "Status 1" is reflected as is, whereas the information "Setting Normal" is not reflected. By displaying "state 1" in the state display area JH, it is now possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1" and that the player is staying in "state 1". There is.

In the state where this "state 1" remains, the frequency (incidence rate) of the setting suggestion performance associated with "state 1" in the fluctuation after the end of the relevant fluctuation (that is, the next fluctuation) The setting suggestion performance will be performed based on the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 1 to 7.

After that, in the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 49(B), the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the middle performance symbol 8C is in a state where the variable presentation (variable display) is continued, and the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are aligned to the same number pattern (here, the number "2") and a reach is formed.

After that, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and furthermore, the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, all pending icons 9A, When the 1st hold display position 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and furthermore, the status display area JH is also hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a). ), the battle performance is started as shown in FIG. 49(C).

When the battle performance starts, an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a as an opponent of the ally character CRA, and a battle between the ally character CRA and the ally character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a. The enemy character CRB fights. Since the battle performance can suggest to the player that the expectation of winning is higher than when the battle performance has not started, the player has a high interest in the battle performance. When the ally character CRA wins in the battle performance, it becomes a win, and then a winning game is started in which the player is given a profit. On the other hand, if the friendly character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB is victorious in the battle performance, it will be a loss.

When the ally character CRA wins in the battle performance, as shown in FIG. "2"), it is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then it is stopped and displayed at the same timing, and the left production symbol 8L, middle production symbol 8C, and right production symbol 8R are all the same symbol (number "2" here), The win is confirmed. When the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a again and are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "2"), the variation icon 9C and the variation display are further displayed. The position 9Cd, all the hold icons 9A, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed on the display screen 7a again.

When a win is determined, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and thereafter, a winning game in which a profit is awarded to the player is started. When a win is confirmed, an announcement image AG1 "Right-handed hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the game switches from a left-handed game to a right-handed game, and a game in which the game ball enters the first grand prize opening 30. The player is informed that this will be done.

When the winning game is started, as shown in FIG. 49(E), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and further, The variable display position 9Cd, all the hold icons 9A, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and the normal background image becomes the jackpot game image. The winning game background image is switched to the winning game background image (the winning game background image is a background image different from the normal background image), and the upper body of the ally character CRA in wingman form is displayed in a large size in front of the winning game background image.

When the winning game ends, as shown in FIG. 49(F), the result screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the announcement image AG1 "Right hit" that was displayed on the upper right corner of the display screen 7a is also displayed on the display screen. It disappears from 7a. The result screen has a winning number image RG1 (here, "win: 1 time") showing the number of winning games in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and a number of winning images RG1 in the center of the display screen 7a indicating the number of winning games. A released ball image RG2 indicating the number of game balls acquired by the player (here, "Total: XXXXX", "XXXXX" is the actually acquired ball, for example, "1350") is displayed. It has become so. When the result screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, the winning game background image is switched to the result background image (the result background image is a background image different from the normal background image and also different from the winning game background image). .

At the timing when the result screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, a setting information suggestion icon SI having a coin shape that suggests setting information may be displayed near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. The setting information suggestion icon SI has a display mode in which the upper body of an ally character image is formed three-dimensionally on the surface of a coin.

The setting information suggestion icon SI is an important image that suggests to the player that the setting information is higher than a predetermined setting, and is displayed when the setting information is setting 3 or higher, setting 4 or higher, or setting 5 or higher. . When the setting information suggestion icon SI is green, it is suggested to the player that the setting information is setting 3 or higher, and when the setting information suggestion icon SI is red, it is suggested to the player that the setting information is setting 4 or higher. However, when the setting information suggestion icon SI is purple, it is suggested to the player that the setting information is setting 5 or higher. In this embodiment, the setting information suggestion icon SI is red.

When the number of hits image RG1, pitched ball image RG2, and setting information suggestion icon SI disappear from the result screen, as shown in FIG. ” is displayed (appears) on a horizontal line passing through the center of the display screen 7a. . The status display image JM3 of this setting suggestion effect includes a character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" and is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. In addition, an announcement image AG2 "left-handed hit" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, indicating that the game will switch from the right-handed game to the left-handed game, and a game will be played in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20. This is communicated to players.

In this embodiment, when the setting information suggestion icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state of the setting suggestion effect is then displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, unless the setting information suggestion icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and the setting information suggestion icon SI is not displayed on the display screen 7a. As a trigger, the state of the setting suggestion performance can be changed.

A state 3 display background image (not shown) exclusively for state 3 is arranged in the inner area of the horizontally long rectangular shape of the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect, and "state 3 settings" is placed in front of this state 3 display background image. An image of the text "Takanobu" is placed. The background image for displaying state 3 has a design and contrast set and is opaque in order to improve the visibility of the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence". As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a that corresponds to the rear of the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is difficult to see through the state 3 display background image. Note that the background image for displaying state 3 may be opaque or semitransparent as long as it can improve the visibility of the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence". In this case, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the state display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect can be visually recognized through the state 3 display background image.

When the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the status display image JM3 of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen except for the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence". From 7a onwards, the image gradually becomes transparent and disappears, and the result background image gradually switches back to the normal background image. At this time, the status display area JH, which is a horizontally long rectangular area formed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, is displayed (appears) again. At this point, "state 1" is displayed in the state display area JH. Then, when the character image "Status 3 Setting High Confidence" moves toward the status display area JH while reducing the size of the characters, and finally moves to the status display area JH, The text image "Status 1" is switched to the text image "Status 3" and displayed. In other words, in the character image "State 3 Setting High Confidence", the information "State 3" is reflected as is, whereas the information "Setting High Confidence" is not reflected. By displaying "State 3" in the state display area JH, the state of the setting suggestion effect changes (jumps) from "State 1" to "State 3", and the stay in "State 3" is made clear to the player. It is now possible to do so.

When this "state 3" remains, the frequency of setting suggestion effects associated with "state 3" ( The setting suggestion performance is performed based on the occurrence rate) and the reliability (reliability rate) of the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, it is determined and performed in the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 24, and in the setting suggestion effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), setting effect pattern 1 to setting effect are selected as setting suggestion effect patterns. Among the patterns 13, the setting suggestion effect will be performed based on any one of the setting effect patterns 8 to 13.

After that, in order to start the next variation, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. A variation effect (variation display) of the symbols is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, only one pending icon 9A remains in stock without being consumed. Note that the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned to the same numerical pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, When the right performance symbols 8R are aligned with the symbols of the same number and are stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed, and thereafter a winning game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

In the state change performance V of the setting suggestion performance, the state of the setting suggestion performance is not displayed on the display screen 7a unless the setting information suggestion icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a on the result screen. In other words, when the setting information suggestion icon SI, which is an important image that indicates to the player that the setting information is higher than the predetermined setting, is displayed on the display screen 7a on the result screen, the setting suggestion presentation The state of is changing (here, changing (jumping) from "state 1" to "state 3").

In the state change performance V of the setting suggestion performance, the state display image of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. 49(G) is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the determination in the state transition process shown in FIG. There is.

Further, in the state change performance V of the setting suggestion performance, when the setting information suggestion icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a on the result screen, the state of the setting suggestion performance changes thereafter. However, if the setting information suggestion icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a before the result screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, the state of the setting suggestion presentation may be changed using this as a trigger.

Further, in the state change performance V of the setting suggestion performance, when the setting information suggestion icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a on the result screen, the state of the setting suggestion performance changes thereafter. However, if the setting information suggestion icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a while an ending image informing the player of the end of the winning game is being displayed on the display screen 7a instead of the result screen, this will trigger , the state of the setting suggestion effect may change, or if the setting information suggestion icon SI is displayed on the display screen 7a before the ending image is displayed on the display screen 7a, this may be used as an opportunity to change the setting suggestion effect. The state of the performance may change.

[Effect example]
Below, examples of effects of the state change effects TV of the setting suggestion effects are shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change performance T of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. 47 and the state change performance U of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. At the time of a lottery (a "winning" or "losing" lottery) associated with the game (ball entry), the setting information is referred to and the lottery is performed with a lottery probability according to the setting information. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance (the setting suggestion performance determination process in FIG. 24) that makes suggestions based on setting information, and has a plurality of setting suggestion performance states in which the settings related to the setting suggestion performance are different from each other. It is designed to be executed based on one of the setting suggestion presentation states. Based on the player's playing time, a transition process of transitioning from the first state of the setting suggestion presentation states to the second state in which the setting suggestion presentation can be an advantageous presentation for the player compared to the first state (see FIG. 23). state transition processing). By executing a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) based on the player's playing time, for example, in FIG. 47(F), when 60 minutes of playing time has elapsed, the state changes from "state 1 setting normal" to "state 2 setting". In FIG. 48(L), when the player presses the production button 63, the character image "State 1" is switched to the character image "State 3" in the state display area JH. In FIG. 49(G), the result screen is transitioned from "state 1, normal settings" to "state 3, settings high confidence." According to this configuration, the transition process of transitioning from the first state of the setting suggestion performance states to the second state where the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player compared to the first state is performed during the player's playing time. In addition to notifying the player of the winning or losing results of the lottery, such as "winning" or "losing", the player can play the game and move from the first state to the second state. It is possible to provide the player with a new game feature in which the player aims to change the state. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the state change production T of the setting suggestion production shown in FIGS. 20 minutes (predetermined time) elapse, another 20 minutes (predetermined time) elapse, and another 20 minutes (predetermined time) elapse, that is, every 20 minutes (predetermined time), the transition process ( The state transition process shown in FIG. 23) can now be executed. According to this configuration, when a predetermined period of time such as every 20 minutes has elapsed since the player started playing, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can be executed. Control can be performed to change the state of the setting suggestion performance depending on the playing time.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the setting suggestion performance state includes a setting normal state (state 1) in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low, and a setting suggestion performance state (state 1) in which the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low. There is a setting high certainty state (state 2) in which the execution frequency is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low, and a setting high certainty state (state 2) in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low. It includes four states: a high setting confidence state (state 3) and a setting high confidence state (state 4) in which the frequency of execution of setting suggestion performances is relatively high and the reliability of setting suggestion performances is relatively high. It is configured as follows. According to this configuration, by changing the state of the setting suggestion performance (setting suggestion performance state) to any one of states 1 to 4, the player aims to achieve a high setting confidence state called state 4. It is possible to add new gameplay.

[Effect 4]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above has a production button 63 (operating means) that can be operated by a player. In the state change effects U of the setting suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 48(D), (E), (I), (J), and (L), the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. 23) 2) or in the case of transitioning to the setting high confidence state (state 3), this transition can be executed when the production button 63 (operation means) is pressed (operated). In FIGS. 48(D) and (E), although the state of the setting suggestion effect does not change to "state 2" and remains in "state 1", the state of the setting suggestion effect changes to "state 1". By displaying text images such as "State 2" and "Waiting for activation" in the state display area JH, the state of the setting suggestion effect can be clearly indicated to the player. It is now possible to inform the player that he has acquired the right to change to "state 2." In FIGS. 48 (I) and (J), although the player has already acquired the right to change the state of the setting suggestion performance to "state 2", since the player has not pressed the performance button 63, the setting suggestion The state of the performance remains at "state 1". For this reason, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the setting suggestion effect is staying in "state 1", and the state display area JH shows "state 3" and "waiting for activation". By displaying the character image , it is possible to inform the player that he has acquired the right to change the state of the setting suggestion performance to "state 3." In FIG. 48(L), when the player presses the production button 63, the status display area JH is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the text image “State 1” changes to the character image “State 3”. This notifies the player that the state of the setting suggestion effect has changed to "state 3" and is to be activated, and also informs the player that the setting suggestion effect has changed to "state 3" and is activated. 3), the status display area background image of the status display area JH is switched to the change activation background image. Thereby, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the state of the setting suggestion performance is in "state 3", that is, the stay in "state 3". According to this configuration, when the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) transitions to the setting high certainty state (state 2) or the setting high confidence state (state 3), this transition is performed using the production button 63 (operating means). Since it can be executed when the button is pressed (operated), once the right to transition to the setting high confidence state (state 2) or the setting high confidence state (state 3) is acquired, the game A person can activate it at any time. In addition, by pressing (operating) the performance button 63 (operating means) at any timing of the player, the setting high certainty state (state 2) or the setting high confidence state (state 3) is activated. It can also be used as a fighting element to draw the hit towards you.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change performance V of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. 49, a lottery ("winning" or " When drawing a "loser" lottery, the setting information is referred to and the drawing is performed with a lottery probability according to the setting information. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance (the setting suggestion performance determination process in FIG. 24) that makes suggestions based on setting information, and has a plurality of setting suggestion performance states in which the settings related to the setting suggestion performance are different from each other. It is designed to be executed based on one of the setting suggestion presentation states. When the result screen is displayed after the ending screen in which the lottery result is a win and the game state is advantageous for the player, the setting suggestion presentation is advantageous for the player compared to the first state of the setting suggestion presentation states. It is now possible to execute a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) that transitions to a second state that can be a performance. In the state change performance V of the setting suggestion performance shown in FIG. 49(G), when the result of the lottery is a win and the result screen appears after the ending screen of the game state that is advantageous to the player, the transition process (state transition process of FIG. 23) is now possible to execute. On the result screen, information important to the player, such as the number of hits image RG1 and ball exit image RG2, is displayed on the display screen 7a. Since the setting information is also important information for the player, an effect suggesting the setting information may be executed on the result screen. Therefore, by executing a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) on the result screen, it is possible to perform control to change the state of the setting suggestion effect. According to this configuration, when it comes to the result screen, the transition process of transitioning from the first state of the setting suggestion presentation states to the second state where the setting suggestion presentation can be an advantageous presentation for the player compared to the first state is performed. In addition to notifying the player of the winning or losing results of the lottery, such as "win" or "loss", the system also allows the player to play the game and change from the first state to the second state. It is possible to provide players with a new game feature of aiming for transitions. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Modified example]
Below, modified examples of the state change effects TV of the setting suggestion effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect V of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. The process (state transition process in FIG. 23) can now be executed. However, instead of the result screen, the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) may be executed on the ending screen of a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Since the setting information is important information for the player, when the ending screen of the game state is reached, an effect suggesting the setting information may be executed. Therefore, when the ending screen of the gaming state is reached, by executing a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23), it is possible to perform control to change the state of the setting suggestion performance. In addition, when the ending screen or result screen of the gaming state is displayed, instead of executing the transition process (the state transition process in FIG. The process (state transition process in FIG. 23) may be executed. Even in this case, control can be performed to change the state of the setting suggestion effect. In this way, when the ending screen or result screen of the gaming state is displayed on the display screen 7a, since the setting information is important information for the player, an effect suggesting the setting information may be executed. Therefore, control is performed to change the state of the setting suggestion performance by executing a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23), aiming at the timing when the ending screen or result screen of the gaming state is displayed on the display screen 7a. You can do it like this.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change production U of the setting suggestion production shown in FIGS. ) is to wait until the timing when the production button 63 (operation means) is pressed (operated) before transitioning to the high setting accuracy state (state 2) or the setting high confidence state (state 3). was now possible. However, if the transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) determines the transition to the setting high certainty state (state 2) and then the setting high confidence state (state 3), then the setting high certainty state (state It may be possible to make a transition to the setting high confidence state (state 3) without transitioning to 2). Even if the high setting certainty state (state 2) or the setting high confidence state (state 3) is displayed alone on the display screen 7a, the player may not be able to narrow down the setting information candidates and make a reliable decision. . Therefore, if you first acquire the first right that determines the transition to the high-confidence state (state 2), then acquire the second right that determines the transition to the high-confidence state (state 3), that is, When two rights are acquired (the first right is acquired and the second right is acquired later), this is used as an opportunity to change the setting high confidence state (state 2) without transitioning to the setting high confidence state (state 2). Transition to 3). In this way, the player may be able to narrow down the setting information candidates and make a reliable decision by transitioning to the high setting confidence state (state 3) after the setting high certainty state (state 2).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change production T of the setting suggestion production shown in FIGS. ) has elapsed, then another 20 minutes (predetermined time) elapse, another 20 minutes (predetermined time) elapse, and another 20 minutes (predetermined time) elapse, that is, the transition process (Fig. 23 state transition processing) can be executed. However, instead of a predetermined period of time elapsed every 20 minutes after the player starts playing, a discharge system is installed at the lowest downstream of the game board 2 that detects all the game balls launched into the game area 3. It may also be the number of outs detected by the sensor 25 (number of outs). In other words, the number of outs (number of outs), which is the number of game balls launched into the game area 3, is a predetermined number (for example, 2000. Since approximately 100 game balls are launched into the game area 3 per minute, 2000 balls in 20 minutes), a transition process (state transition process in FIG. 23) may be executed. In this way, since the player's playing time can be determined by the number of outs (number of outs), it is possible to perform control to change the state of the setting suggestion performance.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the state change effects T of the setting suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 47(B), (D), (F), (H), and (L), FIGS. 48(B), (D), In the state change performance U of the setting suggestion performance in (I) and the state change performance V of the setting suggestion performance in FIG. 49(G), the state display image of the setting suggestion performance was displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the content of the status display image of the setting suggestion effect may be played as audio from the speaker 67. For example, when it is the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect, the content of the state display image JM1 of the setting suggestion effect is "state 1 setting normal", so this "state 1 setting normal" is played from the speaker 67. Good too. In this way, the change in the state of the setting suggestion performance (transition result) can be communicated to the player by voice.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect U of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. It had been. At this time, the voice "activation", which is the content of the message image MS2, may be played from the speaker 67. In this way, it is possible to convey to the player through voice also that the effect of changing the state of the setting suggestion performance has been activated.

[Modification 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the state change effect U of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. The state of the setting suggestion effect (any state from "state 1" to "state 4") was displayed in the display area JH. However, instead of the image display device 7, the state of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed in the display area of another image display device provided on the game board 2, or the status of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed on a sub display device provided in the door frame 53. The state of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed on the screen. Other image display devices provided on the game board 2 may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, a dot matrix, or other image display device. For example, when a decorative member is fixed to the center decorative body 10 at the lower right of the image display device 7, the image display device is provided at the center of this decorative member. Further, the sub-display device includes a right sub-display device, a left sub-display device, and an upper sub-display device. The right sub-display device is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display device is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display device is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display device and the left sub-display device are arranged at paired positions with the game board 2 interposed therebetween. The upper sub-display device is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display device, the left sub-display device, and the upper sub-display device are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub display device may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The state of the setting suggestion effect is displayed on one of the right sub display device, left sub display device, and upper sub display device that constitute the sub display device. In addition, as another image display device provided on the game board 2, when a decorative member is fixed to the center decoration body 10, a predetermined image may be printed in advance instead of the image display device provided on the center decoration body 10. The display device may include a printing member and a built-in backlight (a plurality of light emitting means) arranged behind the printing member. Thereby, a predetermined image can be displayed by causing the built-in backlight (light emitting means) to emit light. A plurality of printing members having predetermined images printed thereon may be provided so that the predetermined images corresponding to the emitted light colors of the built-in backlight (light emitting means) are respectively displayed. In this case, the predetermined images printed on the plurality of printing members are different images. In this way, the emitted light color of the built-in backlight (light emitting means) can be changed to, for example, red (first light emitting means), green (second light emitting means), blue (third light emitting means), white (fourth light emitting means), etc. When the built-in backlight (first light emitting means) emits red light, a predetermined image printed on the first printing member with red light emission (the first predetermined image "State 1"") is displayed, and when the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) emits green light, a predetermined image printed on the second printing member with green light emission ("state 2" which is the second predetermined image) is displayed. ) is displayed and the built-in backlight (third light emitting means) emits blue light, a predetermined image printed on the third printing member with blue light emission (“state 3” which is the third predetermined image) is displayed, and when the built-in backlight (fourth light emitting means) emits white light, a predetermined image (“state 4” which is the fourth predetermined image) printed on the fourth printing member with white light emission is displayed. Is displayed. In this way, by emitting light from the built-in backlight, the state of the setting suggestion effect (any state among "state 1" to "state 4") can be displayed as a predetermined image. Of course, when the built-in backlight is off, the predetermined image is not displayed, so the current state of the setting suggestion effect (any state from "state 1" to "state 4") becomes hidden.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the state change effect T of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 47, the state change effect U of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 48, and the state change effect V of the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. Some parts may not be provided, or other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect 8-1]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a drawing with a drawing probability according to the setting information when drawing a drawing when a game ball enters,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that makes suggestions based on the setting information,
having a plurality of setting suggestion presentation states in which settings regarding the setting suggestion presentation are different from each other;
The setting suggestion performance is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states,
A transition process for transitioning from a first state of the setting suggestion performance states to a second state in which the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player compared to the first state, based on the player's playing time. is practicable,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 8-1,
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the player started playing, the transition process is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 8-1 or aspect 8-2,
When the number of game balls launched into the game area reaches a predetermined number, executing the transition process;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 8-1 to 8-3,
In the setting suggestion production state,
a setting normal state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low;
a high setting certainty state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low;
a setting high confidence state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance is relatively low and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively high;
a setting high confidence state in which the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance is relatively high and the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is relatively high;
It includes four states:
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 8-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect 8-4,
It has an operation means that can be operated by a player,
The transition process is performed by waiting until the timing when the operating means is operated when transitioning to the high setting certainty state or the setting high confidence state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 8-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect 8-4,
If the transition process determines the transition to the set high confidence state after the transition to the set high confidence state is confirmed, the transition process transitions to the set high confidence state without transitioning to the set high confidence state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect 8-7]
A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a drawing with a drawing probability according to the setting information when drawing a drawing when a game ball enters,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that makes suggestions based on the setting information,
having a plurality of setting suggestion presentation states in which settings regarding the setting suggestion presentation are different from each other;
The setting suggestion performance is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states,
When the result of the lottery becomes a winning ending screen of a gaming state advantageous to the player or a result screen after the ending screen of the gaming state, the first state of the setting suggestion presentation states is compared with the first state. can execute a transition process in which the setting suggestion performance transitions to a second state in which the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other variations]
Among the various effects described above, a configuration that does not include some effects or effects other than those described above may be included.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel type game machine such as a slot machine, an arranged ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1 described above, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

Furthermore, two or more production examples and/or modifications among the plurality of production examples and/or modifications described above may be combined. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the above-described display effect may be executed on the sub display device.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modified examples, the embodiments of the above-described aspect are for facilitating understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

1...Game machine 3...Game area 7...Image display device 7a...Display screen 81...Microcomputer for game control 91...Microcomputer for performance control 101...Microcomputer for image control

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a drawing with a lottery probability according to the setting information when drawing a drawing when game balls enter the game,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that makes suggestions based on the setting information,
having a plurality of setting suggestion presentation states in which settings regarding the setting suggestion presentation are different from each other;
The setting suggestion performance is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states,
It is possible to execute a transition process of transitioning from a first state of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states to a second state in which the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player compared to the first state,
executing the transition process when the pending icon becomes a specific icon and the display mode of the specific icon changes;
A gaming machine characterized by: A gaming machine that refers to setting information and performs a drawing with a drawing probability according to the setting information when drawing a drawing when a game ball enters ,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that makes suggestions based on the setting information,
having a plurality of setting suggestion presentation states in which settings regarding the setting suggestion presentation are different from each other;
The setting suggestion performance is executed based on one of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states,
It is possible to execute a transition process of transitioning from a first state of the plurality of setting suggestion performance states to a second state in which the setting suggestion performance can be an advantageous performance for the player compared to the first state,
When the number of times the lottery has been drawn reaches a certain number, the display of the current setting suggestion presentation state is ended,
In the transition process, the more advantageous the setting information is to the player, the greater the certain number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images